Home

Samsung SCX-6545N User's Manual

1. BH Not Completed Bre TG Not Completed DO Box 4 Not Completed Server 1 Not Completed a Total 4 Destination e Transmit Shows the workform s transmit module name e Status shows the setting status To create a workform you have to set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules Z After you do fill out all mandatory items the Save amp Execute and Save button are enabled e Add Module Add transmit module s 4 Before you add module make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module e Fax See Preparing to fax on page 61 e Email Server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 Delete Deletes the selected module Settings Configures the setting values for the module Previous Goes to the next tab Next Goes to the next tab Properties Tab Properties Configuration i E Exit Nama Sondngweakiy report 4 Delay Start oH are Off 8 Secures iioa 4 Prodos Workform Name Sets the workform name Delay Start Schedule the start date and time to start Expired Sets the expire date Secured Locks the workform with password protection Previous Goes to the next tab VARIOUS OPERATIONS WITH WORKFORM User can operate various Jobs with workforms The following items show some example cases Scan to multi destination You can scan a document once and send i
2. bad Properties Click Status idle accepting jobs a Location Description Set as Default Page Selection y Copies All pages Copies 1 100 1 H LU Even pages Odd pages CU Some pages s Enter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by po E commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 i i Hel ok Cancel 4 Change the printer and print job properties Properties Paper Type Printar Default f Duplex Double Sided Printing None w Long Edge Book w Shorl Edge Tablet Pages par Side N Up Normal 1 Up w PUp v 4 Up The following four tabs display at the top of the window e General allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents enables the duplex feature adds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet e Text allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns e Graphics allows you to set image options that are used when printing images files such as color options image size or image position e Device allows you to set the print resolution paper source and destination 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the status of your print job To abort the current job cli
3. You can set the local account for maximum 500 users When the users perform their copy fax print or scan service job with the machine the account module records it You can see the report from Standard Acct Usage Report in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting 5 Print Report tab s Accounting Reports As the device itself can manage user s ID and usage without any remote server this feature is highly suitable for small and medium businesses 77 The accounting system IG regards storing a file to a single server as a single count e Accounting ID List lt shows the accounting ID list You can add edit or delete the ID e Login Setting You can configure for user to login either with ID and password ID amp password Login or with ID only ID only Login e Accounting ID List lt shows the accounting ID list You can add edit or delete the ID e Login Setting You can configure for user to login either with ID and password ID amp password Login or with ID only ID only Login 89 Machine status and advanced setup User Authentication Method If you are an administrator you can enable authentication service before using the machine to improve security for the device If user authentication service has been activated only authorized users can use the device With authentication service you also can give permission to each user and set the maximum number of job executions for a user The authentica
4. The toner cartridge is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not properly connected The toner cartridge is at the end of its life When the toner cartridge replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue this message displays The lifespan of the toner cartridge which the arrow indicates is reached Try to reinstall the toner cartridge Rplace a toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 96 This message appears when the toner is completely empty and your machine stops printing Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 96 The toner cartridge is almost empty The stacker is full of printouts Ensure a replacement cartridge is in stock Remove printouts from the stacker Troubleshooting 110 MESSAGE Too much paper in output bin tray Remove printed paper Use Auxiliary Access 111 Troubleshooting MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The printed papers are full on the output tray The credit is not enough to access the job according to Foreign Device Remove printed outs from the output tray Insert credit into the Foreign Device SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Foll
5. Country You can change the country then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country After installing the fax kit you must change the country Output Options Output Options is for when the staples run out you to let the machine stop processing and wait to refill the staples or continue the job If you set Within Job Offsetting to On the output paper is placed and sorted by printout sets Home Window Background To change the background image of the machine s LCD UI to suit user s preference press Custom select a customized background image file on the list and then press Load Users can register their own background image from SyncThru Web Service Click Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Home Window Customization and add your images on the list Contention Management This feature lets you to select the priority between copy jobs and print jobs e Priority Set the priority by numbering the job The machine starts from the least to the highest number in order e First In First Out The machine does an asked job in order Sound You can adjust the loudness of the machine sound Press Fault to adjust the machine s error sound Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong option Press Selection to sound whenever you press the selection from your touch screen Supplies Management The machine gives you the notification of the imag
6. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner Toner iS a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser Causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna
7. e Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray e If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5 B5 sized paper Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the tray If load the paper this way printing both sides of the paper Duplex is not supported In the printer properties window set the page orientation to be rotated 90 degrees See Software section CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS When an original jams while passing through the DADF the warming message appears on the display screen AN To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document gently and slowly K To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover e Understanding display messages e Solving other problems be as No Pai SO gt SASS Ng Z If you see no paper in this area refer to Roller misfeed See Roller misfeed on page 101 4 Close the DADF cover Then reload the pages you removed if any in the DADF Troubleshooting 100 Misfeed of exiting paper 1 Remove the remaining documents from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 3 Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the DADF at a ct SENSKAT 4 Close the DADF cover and the document
8. or mark 4 Click OK and print the document 5 After printing fold and staple the pages Printing on Both Sides of Paper You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented You can only use this feature with Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized paper The options are e Printer Setting if you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the printer e None e Long Edge which is the conventional layout used in book binding e Short Edge which is the type often used with calendars NI NI TI il a TTT TTT TM PANU Ti oo MN i j A Short Edge gt O gt Q D e Reverse Duble Sided Printing allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order NOTE Do not print on both sides of labels transparencies envelopes or thick paper Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Basic tab select the paper orientation 3 From the Double sided Printing section select the binding option you want 4 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 5 Cli
9. Start Scan New Scan application appears 4 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 5 Click Scan 8 Using Smart Panel NOTES If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer first select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software User s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating System in use Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the status of the printer and allows you to customize the printer s settings If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software If you are a Linux OS user download Smart Panel from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install NOTES The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer the e To use this program you need level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s and various other Windows Check for windows operating system s compatible with miormanon voucan as CHange saung your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Ready Ka Buy Now Linux To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer refe
10. Switches to Printer configuration son Arie Frein Phra Pini Shows the status model name and URI of Loca err your printer un Hm Fil ae You can use the following printer control buttons Refresh renews the available printers list Add Printer allows you to add a new printer e Remove Printer removes the selected printer Set as Default sets the current printer as a default printer Stop Start stops starts the printer Test allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly Properties allows you to view and change the printer properties For details see page 37 Classes Tab The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers Classes O Refresh Add Class Remove Class Shows all of the printer classes Gg Shows the status of the class Selected class and the number of printers in State the class Printers in class Exit GELTWORLS e Refresh Renews the classes list e Add Class Allows you to add a new printer class e Remove Class Removes the selected printer class Scanners Configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices change device properties and
11. cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence 10 contents 11 INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA A 18 33 33 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 Features of your new laser MFP Saf
12. e Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab e Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output See Quality on page 75 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose See Scan Preset on page 75 File Format Selects the file format of the scan output See File Format on page 75 e File Policy Selects the file format of the scan output See File Policy on page 75 e Back Returns to the previous screen CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values Duplex Bi 1 Sided p gt e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees Z To use 2 Sided and
13. e Scanning 41 Installing Software The PostScript driver CD ROM that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file to use the PS driver Apple LaserWriter driver for printing on a Macintosh computer Also it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh computer Installing the printer software 1 Connect your machine to the computer using the USB cable or the Ethernet cable 2 Turn on your computer and the machine 3 Insert the supplied software CD ROM which came with your machine into the CD ROM drive 4 Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_Installer folder Double click the Installer OS X icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue O CON O MI Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations Will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install 10 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue 11 After the installation is finished click Quit NOTE If you have installed scan driver click Restart Uninstalling the printer software 1 Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive 2 Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC
14. e User ID This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel e Job Name This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printer Settings This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality Printer Samsung GON 6545 Sees EF fad Presets Standard as ri Copies 1 p4 Collated _ Two Sided Pages All CFom 1 te 1 Paper Size Ag e 2 26 by 11 59 irthes eo Ortentation Ts le Printer Settings el Toner Save Mode Printer Sening k SAMSUNG 1 of ft ie bil _POFw Supplies A Low Cancel Prints A Mac OS 10 5 Printer Features Printer Features tab provides Reverse Duplex Printing and Fit to Page options Select Printer Features from the drop down list under Orientation to access the following features Advanced Options Printer a ng Scx AS45 Series aj i g Presets Standa rd Copies 1 pA Collared Two Sided Pages tb All L CFrom 1 bo Paper Size Ad bad 8 26 by 11 65 inches Orientation N7 NG Printer Features l Feature Sets Advanced Options wi TI Reverse Duplex Printing lali ais Fito Page Prompt User A C PoFe Supplies L Low Cancel Print A Mac OS 10 5 e Reverse Duplex Printing This option allows you to select general print order compared
15. e Wide A4 It is useful when printing in DOS mode This option prints 80 charactors in a line which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode OPTION DESCRIPTION HDD Spooling To spool documents in HDD for the network printing select On Manual Image Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information To activate this feature go to Admin Setting 5 the Setup tab 5 Optional Service and set the Manual Image Overwrite option to Enable After activating this feature you can overwrite the HDD by pressing Start in the display Stored Job File Policy You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through HDD If the HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it e Rename If the HDD memory already has the same name when you enter a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information Altitude Adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level This feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height district Higher altitude location need to set this feature to High 3 which affects print quality
16. refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK 14 Basic Printing Basic Tab Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page Click the Basic tab to display the options shown below amp Printi ng Preferences PIR Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung a T A4 mm 210x297 mm Qinch a Orientation Partrait O Landscape _ Rotate 180 Degrees O Best j Normal Layout Options s Quality Type F Single Page Per Side 3 Double Sided Printing j Printer Default O None O Long Edge O Short Edge Reverse Double Sided Printing Ca aa Orientation This option allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page e Portrait This option prints across the width of the page letter style e Landscape This option prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style e Rotate 180 Degrees This option allows you to rotate the page 180 degrees Dt A Portrait A Landscape Quality The available Quality options may vary depending on your machine The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed cha
17. 20 Ib Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches ray for the multi purpose bond in the multi purpose tray y 7 e 2 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches 80 to 120 g m 16 to 321b bond in the high capacity bond for the high capacity feeder Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches feeder JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches Statement 140 x216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Envelope Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm 6 92 x 9 84 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib e 50 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper for the tray Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches e 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib in h Iti t Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches Mema Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Transparency Letter A4 Oficio Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib paper for the tray e 20 sheets of 80 g m2 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray Labels Letter Legal Folio Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 bond paper for the tray CA Po aie e 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib in atement Oficio the multi purpose tray Card stock Letter
18. 5 When the welcome screen appears click Next E Unified Linux Driver Installer Welcome to the Unified Linux Driver installation wizard This program will install all necessary software for printers and MFP devices Click Next to continue with the Setup program Help Next gt Cancel 6 When the installation is complete click Finish Unified Linux Driver Installer Unified Linux Driver is installed Please re logon your system for all the installation settings to take effect User Registration Do you want to register yourself as user of the printer MFP model you just installed Being registered you will gain access to various services X Yes want to be registered as user Late a ma The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager NOTE Installing the driver in the text mode e f you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver installation you have to use the driver in the text mode e Follow the step 1 to 3 then type root localhost Linux install sh than follow the instruction on the terminal screen Then the installation completes
19. In the duplex unit See In the duplex unit area on page 107 Paper jam in front of finisher In the stacker unit See Paper jam in front of finisher on page 107 Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher s duplex In the stacker unit See Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher s duplex on page 107 Paper jam at exit of finisher In the stacker unit See Paper jam at exit of finisher on page 108 AN jam To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the In the tray 1 1 Pull out the paper tray to open After you pull it out completely lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine Once you remove the jammed paper here open the side cover and then close it to clear the error message on the display If there is any resistance and the paper does not move immediately when you pull stop pulling Then 3 Open the side cover Troubleshooting_ 102 Z Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface Scratches or smudges will result in poor print quality 4 Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown p HO f a yg Zo 5 Close the side cover and insert the paper tray Lower the rear part of the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine then inse
20. Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher s duplex 1 Open the stacker front cover 2 Pull the stacker lever 1a down If necessary pull the stacker lever 1b down as well 3 Remove the jammed paper Paper jam at exit of finisher 1 Gently pull the paper out through the exit area UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order K e Ifthe message is not in the table cycle the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service e When you call for service it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models e yyy indicates the part of the machine e zzz indicates the error code When you contact the service center this error code help to handle the problem e You may see an exclamation mark 8 or a cross mark on the upper left of the display in that case press the question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies pn O1 01 2008 1200 AM X MESSAGE yyy is worn Replace with new one DC motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then
21. Use this feature to store destination names fax numbers and transmission settings in your machine There are two options Individual and Group l Individual Group e Individual Stores up to 500 fax numbers And the fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No e Group Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations You can store up to 100 group dial numbers Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list on the Basic tab of Fax Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries The fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No 1 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Individual naa Dahi 12345 023 kgaya pm 022 Ooty 12345 A Gaman vas ozo Paris izm e vease Ean Now Dotare search otaa Annir cance Edit Changes the ID Speed Dial No and Fax No New Creates the new Speed Dial No Delete Deletes the selected Speed Dial No Search Searches the fax number which currently stored in Individual phonebook When the keyboard pops up enter ID e Detail Shows ID Fax No and Included group information if it is grouped See Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No on page 66 e Apply Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list in the Basic tab e Cancel Cancels the current job and goes to th
22. e When you wan to uninstall the driver follow the installation instruction above but type root localhost Linux uninstall sh on the terminal screen 34 Using Your Printer in Linux Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver 1 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh Click Uninstall Click Next Uninstallation of Unified Linux Driver You ave about to uninstall the Unified Linux Driver Press Next to proceed with uninstalling the driver Press Cancel to leave the driver intact atan oi iset 2o 5 Click Finish Scanners Configuration button e5 Using the Unified Driver Configurator Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I O channel
23. 5 From the Document menu select Cancel 4 You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel Canceling a print job Basic printing 60 faxing optional This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes Preparing to fax Understanding the Fax screen Sending a fax Receiving a fax Adjusting the document settings Setting up a fax phonebook Using the polling option K e You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone For more information ask the internet service provider e You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission slower fax transmmission poor fax quality and communication failures when faxing over VolP network Contact you local network administrator or Internet Service Provider for more details e To use advanced features of the fax press Machine Setup on the control panel and Admin Setting gt Setup gt Fax Setup See Fax Setup on page 86 e We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to use Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VolP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection qua
24. 5 For Mac OS X 10 4 Select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked and click Connect f a warning message appears click Change Port to select port e f TWAIN UI appears from the Preference tab click Change Port to select port 48 NOTE Refer to Scan Manager for Change Port use See Setting scan information in Scan Manager on page 48 For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the Mac OS X10 4 steps above 6 Set the scan options on this program 7 Scan and save your scanned image NOTES For more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help e Use TWAIN compliant softwares to apply more scan options e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Setting scan information in Scan Manager To find out about Scan Manager program information to check the installed scan driver s condition to change scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in Scan Manager program follow these instructions 1 From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar click Scan Manager 2 Select
25. Altitude Adj 4 Select the appropriate altitude value 5 Click Apply Setting the authentication password To set your machine up or change the settings you have to login To change password follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Then press OK Factory setting 1111 4 Press the Setup tab gt Authentication 5 Press Change Admin Password j 4 Paman See lng PantReport Fax Setup Oh Pasaword Nat kSatup maw Pewar Amhanticalion Confinn Password Optional Senice 6 Enter old and new password and then confirm the new password 29 _Getting Started 7 Press OK Setting the date and time When you set the time and date they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print also they are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for correct time being Z If power to the machine is cut off you need to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab gt Date amp Time gt Date amp T
26. Auto Redirection To create and execute a workform including the auto redirection feature enable this option Approve To create and execute a workform including the approval feature enable this option Complete Report To add a completion report in your workform enable this option Complete To add a completion notification in your workform Notification enable this option Default Fax To create and execute a workform including the fax feature enable this option Machine status and advanced setup_ 92 PRINTING A REPORT You can print a report on the machine s configuration or font list etc 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Print Report tab Painin Setting OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Print Pa Meiwork Schedule Jobs Accounting Reports Jag mba fins import PS3 Font Lie PCL Font List aa OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Print You can print Network Configuration PS3 Font List PCL Font List and Schedule Jobs Report Schedule Jobs Report shows the job list in pending in delayed faxing or the Mailbox list as well Accounting Supplies You can print the amount of each Reports Information category that your machine has printed so far Network Auth It displays user login IDs and Log Report emails Usage Page You can print the report on the Report
27. INS la NG smaa jog i Savingtobox Saving to box Fax number input area Shows the recipient s fax number using the number keypad on the control panel If you configured the phone book press Individual or Group See Setting up a fax phonebook on page 66 e Add No Lets you add more destinations e Deletes the last digit entered e Removes all digits of the selected entry Remove Removes the selected fax number entry Remove All Removes all the fax numbers in the input area Address Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your machine or from SyncThru Web Service See Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service on page 67 e Duplex Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the Original both sides of the original e Resolution Adjusts the resolution options e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use Z For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 77 Advanced tab Delay Send CH Priority Send li Poling 7 Bak e Job Build Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax transmission See Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission on page 64 e Original Size Selects the size of the original document Press OK to update current setting e Delay Send Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without
28. Legal Folio Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 220 g m 24 to 58 Ib e 50 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Oficio A6 Post Card 4x6 bond paper for the tray 10 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray Minimum size custom 98 x 148 mm 3 86 x 5 83 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond a lf media weight is over 105 g m 28 Ib bond use the multi Astley tray b Maximum capacity may differ dependin c High capacity feeder is not supported A 35 Loading originals and print media aon media weight t ickness end environmental conditions Media sizes supported in each mode Guidelines for special print media MODE SIZE SOURCE MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Copy mode Letter A4 Legal Oficio Folio Executive JIS B5 A5 A6 tray 1 optional tray 2 multi purpose tray high capacity feeder Single side printing All sizes supported by the machine tray 1 optional tray multi purpose tray high capacity feeder Letter A4 Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Duplex printing tray 1 optional tray multi purpose tray Statement high capacity feeder Fax mode Letter A4 Legal trayi e optional tray e high capacity feeder a 75 to 90 g m 20 24 Ib only b Only the optional fax kit is installed Enve
29. Order a new toner cartridge You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 96 The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 The toner cartridge is totally empty Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 96 A paper jam has occurred See Clearing paper jams on page 102 The cover is opened Close the cover There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message See Understanding display messages on page 108 21 Introduction iY Check the message on the display screen and follow the instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part See Troubleshooting on page 100 If the problem persists call for service MENU OVERVIEW The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine Setup Job Status or touching menus on the display screen Refer to the following diagram Main screen The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel Some menus are grayed out depending on your model Basic tab Page 41 Original Size Reduce Enlarge Duplex Output Original Type Darkness Pape
30. PDF and PRN files See Scan to USB e Changing the scan feature settings e Printing from a USB memory device Printing from a USB memory device on page 76 e Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job See Scan to USB on page 73 PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector m D X Use only a metal shielded USB memory device O 3 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of your machine Using USB memory device_ 72 A N e Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use s misuse e If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE You
31. POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION PostScript file The PostScript e Install the PostScript File in Use message appears during installation Exit all software applications Remove all software from the StartUp Group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again cannot be driver may not be driver referring to printed installed correctly Software section e Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing e Ifthe problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check The print job was You might need to reduce the Error message too complex complexity of the page or appears install more memory Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The
32. and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table 100 mm 300 mm db 11 8inches 482 6 mm 19 inches DIDITH a a e2e a Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1 000 m 3 281 ft Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing See page 29 for more information Place the machine on a flat stable surface so that there Is no incline greater than 5 mm 0 02 inch Otherwise printing quality may be affected Zeseaaaaa oo9999 2 Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items 25 Getting Started e Installing the software e Machine s basic settings Understanding the keyboard Remove the tape holding the machine tightly Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit Load paper See Loading paper on page 38 Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine Turn the machine on NO OT a O A N e This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails e When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing quality e If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long time turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode Then close the scan lid and turn the power off And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock SETTING UP THE NETWORK You need to set up the network
33. e If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On you cannot use a fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination by faxing 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel 7 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax With this feature you can forward every fax you received to other destination by faxing When the machine receives a fax a fax is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel e f you want to set the star time and end time select Start Time
34. edit the image Function Saves the image Function a Cancels your last action Undo al Restores the action you canceled Redo ay Allows you to scroll through the image Scroll x Crop Crops the selected image area Fi Zooms the image out Zoom Out Ei Zooms the image in Zoom In 5 Allows you to scale the image size you can enter bel y the size manually or set the rate to scale Seale proportionally vertically or horizontally ch Allows you to rotate the image you can select the Rotate number of degrees from the drop down list E Allows you to flip the image vertically or Flip i horizontally Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of Effect the image or to invert the image mj Shows the properties of the image Properties For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the onscreen help 40 Using Your Printer in Linux 10 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built in USB interface or a 10 100 Base TX network interface card When you print a file from a Macintosh computer you can use the PostScript driver by installing the PPD file NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide This chapter includes e Installing Software e Setting Up the Printer e Printing
35. measurements 84 output option 85 setting a fax header 62 sound 85 supplies management 85 system timeout 84 tray management 85 tray setting 30 driver installation 27 duplex copying 43 faxing 65 scanning 57 74 E email address entering email addresses to input field 54 Global 54 Group 54 Individual 54 storing 54 energy saver 29 erasing background copying 48 faxing 65 scanning 58 75 erasing punch hole 48 error correction mode 86 error message 108 extension telephone 65 F fax option kit enabling option feature after installing the kit 125 ordering 121 fax receiving changing the receive mode 64 extension telephone 65 in answering machine fax 64 in memory 65 secure receiving 65 fax sending automatic resending 63 delay sending 63 duplex sending 62 redialing the last number 63 sending a fax 62 sending a fax manually 63 sending a priority fax 64 setting a fax header 62 fax setup 86 faxing color mode 66 darkness 65 enabling the fax kit option 92 125 erasing background 65 original type 65 phonebook 66 printing a fax report 94 resolution 65 solving faxing problems 117 FDI Foreign Interface Device ordering 122 finisher Stacker amp Stapler ordering 121 paper jam 107 front cover 18 FTP 56 G general settings 84 Gray scan 58 74 Group Group fax number 66 132 ID copy 45 imaging unit 18 imaging unit reorder notification 94 Individual email addresses for sc
36. on Did not supply enough toner Remove seal tape amp reinstall Did not supply enough toner Please open close door Fax memory is almost full Print or remove received fax Job Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax Job Finisher door is open Close it MEANING The life of the part expires totally There is a problem in the control of DC motor unit Not supplied toner to the imaging unit The machine received several papers with many images and it cannot supply the toner properly There is no more available fax memory No more fax data can be received Available fax memory is now 1MB The finisher cover is not securely latched SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Replace the part with a new one Call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service e Remove the sealing tape from the imaging unit e Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times and reinstall it e Turn the machine off and turn it on again Open side door and close it If the problem still persists please call for service Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory Call for service Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory Call for service Close the finisher until it locks into place Troubleshooting_ 108 MESSAGE Finisher error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser error z
37. printer driver name Maintenance Select Repair and click Next The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCPAP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name ra i al Update lt Back J News Jj Cancel elf you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item individually 11 NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear pa g Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between pour computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 IF New Hardware Wizard is appeared
38. such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values Duplex Bi 1Sided p gt e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees Z To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided 57 Scanning Original Size You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre defined size or putting in the margin value or Auto If you set this option to Auto the machine senses and determines the size of the original Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK 148 356mm Ato JIS BS 1 E
39. 35 Copy image is skewed Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear e The imaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 96 e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Image rubs off the copy easily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams occur Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight 80 g m bond paper is recommended Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer option
40. CUSTOMER CARE ION CENTER ee RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sg 726 7864 SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sk 726 7864 SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG www samsung com za 726 7864 SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com es 678 SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 www samsung com se SAMSUNG SWITZERLAND 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com ch CHF 0 08 min TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th 02 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com latin TOBAGO 726 7864 TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com tr U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae 8000 4726 U K 0845 SAMSUNG www samsung com uk 726 7864 U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com us 7267864 UKRAINE 8 800 502 0000 www samsung ua www samsung com ua ru UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com latin VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com vn Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 136 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide e Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd e PCL
41. Fine 300 x 300 dpi mono 200 x 200 dpi color Memory Max 2 GB uses HDD Halftone 256 levels Auto dialer up to 200 numbers a Standard resolution MMR JBIG Maximum modem speed Phase C by ITU T No 1 chart Memory Tx ECM glossary 14 The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a sal map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address au
42. Pages All From 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad kad 8 26 by 11 65 inches Orientation Paper Paper Type Printer Default it oa lul ft fe SAMSUNG C Cancel Print T PDFv Supplies Low A Mac OS 10 5 45 Job Accounting This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data or change the password Printer Samsung SCX 6545 Kating w fa Perseis Standard ET Copies 1 T Wl Collated Two Sided Pages All Ci From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 bS 6 28 by 11 89 inches Orientation TH Te Job Accounting req a J 1 a User Permission LO Group Permission User iD Left a Enter Passwond i 3 Alphanumeric Confirm Password 4 32 Alphanumeric SAMSUNG Pi POF O Supplies L Low Cancel Print A Mac OS 10 5 Job Setting This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD Printer Samsung SOX 6545 Series l fa Copies 1 B4 Collated C Two Sided Pages All C From 1 te 1 F LEI Presets Standard Ad OP 0 26 by 11 89 inches Paper Size Orientation TH le Job 5erting e54 Pring Mode Normal bed St re to HDD loaf lt pi User 1D A 2 0 9 Job Name A z 0 9 SAMSUNG Cancel Y Print PD Pore Supplies Low A Mac OS 10 5 e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD
43. SAn Ld IED VAP A 3x3 Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to pasting the sheets together 0 15 inches A A H ab D m8 DY 4 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type O Ke 0 15 inches 5 Click OK and print the document You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together Advanced Printing 20 Printing Booklets This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet NOTE If you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 Us Folio or Oficio sized print media 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Basic tab choose Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list 3 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type NOTE The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab If you select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without
44. Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press Redial 5 Select Redial Term and Redial Times Rendy General Seti Print Report Rockall Tern GH ten Reda Times aaa 6 Press OK Redialing the last number 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 3 Place the originals face up into the DADF 4 Press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers 5 Select a fax number in the list and press OK The machine automatically begins to send Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present 1 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document seitings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Delay Send Press On Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display select Start Time with left right arrows Aap wh aau Hit 4 a Job Aan gt LHI Delay Send S Fak end Job Priority Send baa on si Stan Ire P a Hoan 01 171 Minute 00 65 jets os mdli oo an PM Jude oe cra e If you do not enter Job Name the machine assigns the job name as Fax Send Job xxx xxx number are set in order Start Time is the spe
45. Shared Printer UNC If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 C Add TCP IP Pot R2 click Start gt All prog rams Accessories Run and type Select a printer from the list below IF you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list X Setup exe IP Port Name If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window Update Set IP Address lt Back Next gt Cancel elf you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer 9 Installing Printer Software in Windows To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page eTo find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide TIP If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific
46. THE PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray 1 paper length guide 2 paper width guide Z If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder refer to Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size 1 Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length It is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country To load another size hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding position 2 After inserting paper into the tray while pinching the paper width guide as shown move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper When you use legal sized paper you need to extend the length of the tray 3 Load the paper into the tray 4 Place the tray into the machine 5 Set the paper size from your computer iY e Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams LOADING PAPER Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1 The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond plain paper You can purchase an optional tray and attach it be
47. al Da Tas m AA Letter Gg TEN 36 2160 _ il is a A5 Legal buo ae Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK E Text Photo Fhoto e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK Color l Gray Mono ae e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes t
48. and change any remaining settings using the printer driver The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK 24 Layout tab The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page gt Printing Preferences X Layout Paper Quality Orientation Portrait O Landscape O Rotated Landscape Print on Both Sides None Da O Flip on Long Edge ZA O Flip on Short Edge ss Page Order BE Front to Back O Back to Front Pages Per Sheet 1 w Orientation This option allows you to select the direction in which the information is printed on a page Portrait This option prints across the width of the page letter style e Landscape This option prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style e Rotate Landscape This option allows you to rotate the page 180 degrees Print on Both Sides You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper Before printing decide how you want your document or
49. and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper Refer to the Software section for details Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The machine may be turned on and off frequently The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your printer is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging You can set this option through Paper or Printer tab in printer driver s properties See Altitude adjustment on page 29 Scanning problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Copying problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Copies are too light or too dark Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or lighten the backgrounds of copies Smears lines marks or spots appears on copies e Ifthe defects are on the original press Light and Dark arrows to lighten the background of your copies the scan unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 95 e f there are no defects on the original clean The scanner doe
50. com latin HONG KONG 3698 4698 www samsung com hk www samsung com hk_en ION CENTER VERSIE HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG www samsung com hu 726 7864 INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com in 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com id ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com it JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com latin JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com jp LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com It LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www samsung com lu MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com mx 726 7864 MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG www samsung com nl 0900 7267864 0 10 min NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com nz 786 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com latin NORWAY 3 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com no PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com latin PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG www samsung com ph 726 7864 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 02 5805777 POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG www samsung com pl 172678 022 607 93 33 PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG www samsung com pt 726 7864 PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin REP DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin EIRE 0818 717 100 www samsung com ie 135 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide COUNTRY REG
51. default boxes which you cannot modify them Type Shows the box is secured or not Box Name Shows the box name Owner Shows the user name of a box Date Shows the date of a box created File Shows the number of total files in the box Add Lets you add more boxes Delete Deletes the selected box Edit Lets you modify a box name and an owner name Detail Shows box information Report Prints the information about the documents inside the selected box Search Searches a box with a box name or an owner name Enter Prints or sends the stored file in the box t Tm EN Box Adding Screen You can create a new box to store your scanned data To add a new Document Box press Add on the Document Box screen Z The following are some constraints about the document box e You can create maximum 100 document boxes e A document box can contain up to 200 stored documents e The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters e Common Te box is already created by default e Box Name Enter a box name e Owner Enter the user name of the box s owner e Secured Box Check to make a secured type box e New Password Enter a new password to access the box e Confirm Password Enter the password again Edit a Box Screen You can modify a box name or an owner name To modify a Document Box select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit Ful Cim Bos Nama Lk Homer ymer K s Fave km ex Box Nam
52. discolor or distort the cabinet e If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth You can dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the transfer unit The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its printing quality The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10 000 pages printing 1 Prepare a soft lint free cloth 2 Turn off the machine 3 Unplug the power cable 4 Open the side cover 6 Close the side cover 95 Maintenance 7 Plug the power cable and turn the machine on Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry 1 white sheet 2 DADF glass 3 scanner lid 4 scanner glass 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until
53. documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop The first time you scan with your machine select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use The basic scanning process involves a number of steps 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 3 Open an application such as Photoshop 4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE You need to follow the program s instructions for acquiring an image Please refer to the user s guide of the application Scanning Using the WIA Driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software NOTE The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Server 2003 Vista 7 with USB port Windows XP Server 2003 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 From the Start menu on your desktop window select Settings Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras 3 Double click
54. faxes manually using an extension telephone on page 65 Error Correction lt helps with poor line quality and makes sure any Mode faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other ECM equipped fax machines Sending a fax using ECM may take more time Print Setup banat aha SS rad Es a OPTION DESCRIPTION Manual ID Copy This option sets the ID copy settings such as the Setup number of images or copying positions manually See Copying ID with the manual ID copy option on page 45 FAX SETUP This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax system You can change the default settings for your preferences and needs 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Fax Initial Setup You can set Receive Mode for Telephone Fax or Answering Machine Fax and Dial Mode at either Pulse Dial Pulse or Tone Multi Frequency When you select Answering Machine Fax you can receive a fax while the line is being used by the answering machine See Changing the receive modes on page 64 Contact your local telephone company for Dial Mode setting information Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Receive Header Use this option to automatically print the page number date and time of fax recept
55. feature 1 Press Scan gt Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt File Format gt PDF 2 Press PDF Encryption 3 Press On CET Access Permission Scan Preset ys Hanca 128 bit j Prim Ees Hatauaity print Modify jt i Madlily contents j Ha File Formal Caner Password ker Pasaword wt Edtract text and graphics ba KO ME 59 Scanning 4 Select an encryption level e Low RC4 40 bits Recommended for Acrobat 3 0 or later version e High RC4 128 bits Recommended for Acrobat 5 0 or later version e High AES 128 bits Recommended for Acrobat 7 0 or later version 5 Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF 6 Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the Access Permission menu below 7 Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying This configuration will affect the users accessed with the User Password 8 Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to extract text or graphics 9 Press OK Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Shaingand loc Printing ER jd Archival Record Custom es e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size e A
56. from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Margin Shift 4 Select Margin Shift option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Center Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically The original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature This option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass e Custom Margin Adjusts the margin of the left and right top and bottom as you want using arrows This option supports both on the scanner glass or in DADF 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying o Watermark copying You can copy the original with a watermark For example you can use it when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the COpy mm Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt WaterMark Select WaterMark option e Off Disables this feature e Top Secret Prints the original with Top Secret text e Confidential Prints the original with Confidential text e Urgent Prints the original with Urgent text e Draft Prints the original with Draft text e Custom The machine prints the original with the customized text 6 Select 1st Page only Size Position Darkness of opt
57. in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 92 Approval feature Before executing the transmit module you can get approval from an administrator Z Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 92 Using standard workflow_ 82 machine status anc advanced setup This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine s diverse features This chapter includes Machine Setup Browsing the machine s status General settings Copy Setup Fax Setup MACHINE SETUP 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select the appropriate item for your occasion e Machine Status Shows the current machine status e Admin Setting Allows administrator to set up the machine When you press Admin Setting login message pops up Enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 e Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray e Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Machine Status screen Press Machine Setup on the control panel and pr
58. in tray 2 Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF Paper Jam in tray 3 Paper Jam in tray 3 HCF Paper Jam in tray 4 Paper jam inside finisher s duplex Paper Jam inside of duplex path Paper Jam inside of machine Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred Shake toner cartridge Staple cartridge is empty Replace it MEANING Paper Misfed from multi purpose tray Paper misfed from tray Or paper has jammed in the tray feed area Or the tray cover is opened Paper jammed in the stacker Paper has jammed during duplex printing SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Clear the jam See In the multi purpose tray on page 106 Clear the jam See In the tray 1 on page 102 and see In the optional tray on page 103 and see In the optional high capacity feeder on page 104 Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b Clear the jam See In the duplex unit area on page 107 Paper has jammed in the registration area The CCD Charged Couple Device lock has been locked The CCD does not detect its home location or move The toner supply is low Stapler is run out Clear the jam See In the paper exit area on page 106 Unlock the CCD lock See Front view on page 18 Or turn off the machine and on again Try again If the problem persists call for service Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six tim
59. machine reverses the print out order of the Originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper I Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper The information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 I J e Reverse 2 gt 2 Sided Scans the both sides of originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the back sides of originals first which means the front sides of originals is printed on the back side of a paper z 1 Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple Press the Basic tab gt Output then use left right arrows to select Collated or Stapled This fea
60. menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print when you finish setting the options 44 Changing Printer Settings You can use advanced printing features when using your printer From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu The printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the printer in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar NOTES The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation to access the following features Printer Samsung SCX 6545 Series a a Standard 7 ry Copies 1 4Collared _ Two Sided Pages All C From 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad wb 8 26 by 11 89 inches Onentation lt Li Fj nara E Pages per Sheet pja E i tercihini EA ks LA sl oe TOT pipo poen a Border None hd Two Sided OF Wed Aaya Page Orientation 7 Pore Supplies Low Cancel PPri A Mac OS 10 5 Pages per Sheet This feature determines how many pages printed on one page For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper on page 47 Layout Direction You can select the printing direction o
61. network printer click the Set IP Address button The Set IP Address window appears Do as follows Set IP Address You can set or change IP address for the network printer a lt in sd gt Information Update Printer MAC Address IP Address Configure Subnet Mask l Default Gateway a lt Back News Cancel a Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list b Configure an IP address subnet mask and gateway for the printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the network printer e Click Next 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next Select components that you would like to install Select components Select components that you would like to install Chanae Destination Folder lt Back Cancel 10 NOTE You can change the desired installation folder by clicking Browse 7 Select the components to be installed After selecting the components the following window appears You can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on the network set the printer as the default printer and change the port name of each printer Click Next Set Printer Po nmsunog Change printer settings to be installed Default Printer Shared Name 3 You can change the printer name by selecting the name and en
62. not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name e For MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 7 Click Add 43 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing NOTES e The Macintosh printer s properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window Is similar e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM Printing a Document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh 1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling and other options and click OK Settings Page Attributes pa Format for Samsung SCX 6545 Series Le Samsung SCX Make sure that your Paper Size Ad y printer is selected 8 26 by 11 69 Orientation ic CD Scale 100 D Cancel J Ok Sa s A Mac OS 10 5 4 Open the File
63. on document settings refer to Admin Setting gt General tab gt Default Settings See General settings on page 84 65 _Faxing Optional Duplex This function is especially intended for two sided originals You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the value Duplex 1Sided p gt e 1 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on both sides Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values Resolution Standard pr e Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time e Fine Recommended for the originals containing with small characters thin lines or text that was printed using a dot matrix printer e Super Fine Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine detail this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Super Fine resolution Z For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine Original Type You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document be
64. other menu press K8 to go to the Main screen Ira First wx 8 La Second Second 2111 2006 Thind Third 212008 aT a Furth Fourth zinam 2m Filth Filth 272006 a aT Sath Siah inaw Total 10 Boxes o La Free Space 637 MB Total 8000 GE e User Box tab Create the box where you can save the document such as the file you have printed sent by email or scanned When you create a box you can set the password to secure your box The box with a password is called Secured Box and without it it is called public box e System Box tab The machine provided default boxes which you cannot modify them Type Shows the box is secured or not Box Name Shows the box name Owner Shows the user name of a box Date Shows the date of a box created File Shows the number of total files in the box Add Lets you add more boxes Delete Deletes the selected box Edit Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name Detail Shows box information Search Searches a box with a box name or an owner name Enter Prints or sends the stored file in the box CLEANING YOUR MACHINE To maintain print and scan quality follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur Maintenance_ 94 A N e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can
65. paper supply problems you can attach an additional 2 100 sheet tray SCX HCF100 a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 b Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4 or letter sized paper Z Depending on the options and job mode the imaging unit s lifespan may differ N When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased Otherwise print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies vary depending on the specific country ACCESSORIES Fax option kit This kit lets you use your machine as a fax machine SCX FAX210 77 After installing L the kit you have to set up your machine to activate this machine See You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s performance and capacity ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER Memory module Extends your machine s memory capacity ML MEM160 256 MB comes with 256 MB DIMM To expand the memory of your machine you must remove the existing DIMM and purchase a larger one 4 This machine 121 Ordering supplies and accessories Page 125 Stand You can place the e Tall Stand SCX machine on the DSK10T ergonomically e Short Stand SCX designed cabinet which DSK10S lets you reach the machine convenient
66. protocols on the machine to use it as your network printer You can set up the basic network settings with the machine s touch screen A If you want to use the USB cable connect the cable between a computer and you machine Then refer to Software section Supported operating systems The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine ITEM REQUIREMENTS Network interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Network operating system Novell NetWare 5 x 6 x e Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e Mac OS 10 3 10 6 Network protocols e TCP IP e EtherTalk Dynamic addressing server DHCP BOOTP Z If you are in a non static IP address environment and need to set up a DHCP network protocol go to http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to set network parameters automatically Follow the instructions in the installation window This program does not support Linux Configuring network protocol via the machine You can set up TCP IP network parameters follow the steps listed below 1 Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ 45 Ethernet cable Make sure you have turned on the machine Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message appears ent
67. re nr ne nen ee ee eee ee ee eee 25 5 Using Direct Printing Utility Overview Direct LA AR PN PARA RE AE EEEE 26 PANUNG Kana 26 From the Direct Printing Utility window 111111111 26 Usma L28 late ale AA AA Aaa 26 Using the right click menu U 11111111111 1 26 6 Sharing the Printer Locally Seting Up a Host COMPULET 422p aaG0phNG NANA GENIE 0 AGANG NEL NGANGA SOLB LOGAN KNA 27 Seno Up a Os l 0 CON 00 Ka AA NANA AA NAA AA AA UG 27 7 Scanning Scanning Using SmarThru Office u 11 1111 a 28 v f lala Ke MG AA 28 QUE SAN GUINTO tam AN ANAN a AA E E 28 Using SmarThru Office u s 28 Uninstalling Smar TMU OMG aaa AA ama AA aNd 29 Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software 11112127QQX a 30 Scanning Using the WIA DAYEN cisscccornctascesnetetcercatasGapendsbeettedacteduadsbaetnndascedcedanaudsyvssteesetis Ea Aaa NE TE 30 Windows XP Server 2003 pka NANU ANAN ea eaea aaia Ena aiara 30 o oE IA a E E E EE E E EE PAA 30 WING OWG T serari EE AA 30 8 Using Smart Panel Unaerstanding omalt PANGI ANA AA aaa 31 Opening the Troubleshooting Guide 111110111 11 32 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings aa NA AG AD AG NAG 32 9 Using Your Printer in Linux CASE ULA 33 Installing the Unified LINUX Driver 22am AGANG tana AA AA AA 33 Installing the Unified Linux Driver Uu 1 a 33 Uninstalling ine Unitied Lin x DIVET ua anG A EGG NGA AG NG GG GA ANA ANAN 34 Using the Unifie
68. representative Troubleshooting_ 112 CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print Continued The document size is So big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the printer properties may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen The printer does no
69. several formats e You can create a booklet using sequential 2 sided document production e There are special functions to erase punch holes staple marks and newspaper background e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhanced at the same time Scan the originals and send it right away e Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using E mail SMB FTP or Networks scanning e Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email addresses and send the scanned image immediately e Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Set a specific time to transmit a Fax Optional e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations e After the transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting Use USB memory devices If you have a USB memory device you can use it in various ways with your machine e You can scan documents and save them to the device e You can directly print data stored to the device e You can back up data and restore backup files to the machine s memory IPv6 This machine supports IPv6 FEATURES BY MODELS The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business Basic features of this machine include FEATURES USB 2 0 USB Memory DADF Duplex Automatic Documen
70. stock Print side up and the short edge entering the machine first e Previously printed paper Previously printed side down with an uncurled edge toward the machine 5 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray See Setting the paper size and type on page 40 for copying and faxing or the Software section for PC printing iY The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the control panel 6 After printing fold the multi purpose tray extension and close the multi purpose tray SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE After loading paper in the paper tray you need to set the paper size and type These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes For PC printing you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the General tab Press the down arrow to switch the screen press Tray Management Select tray and its options such as paper size and type Press OK oe Loading originals and print media_ 40 CODYING This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine This chapter includes e Understanding the Copy screen e Copying originals UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN When you press
71. the appropriate machine from the Scan Manager 3 Press Properties 4 Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings to add or delete application programs and to format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change port Local or Network 5 When done press OK Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Software section Index A advanced printing use 19 Advanced properties set 17 B Basic properties set Windows 15 booklet printing 20 C canceling scan 30 D document print Macintosh 44 Windows 13 double sided printing 21 duplex printing print 24 F favorites settings for printing 17 favorites settings use 17 G Graphics properties set 16 H help use 18 25 install printer driver Macintosh 41 Windows 5 installing Linux software 33 L Linux driver install 33 printer properties 37 printing 37 scanning 38 Macintosh driver install 41 printing 44 scanning 48 setting up the printer 42 MFP driver install Linux 33 N n up printing Macintosh 47 Windows 19 O orientation print 37 Windows 15 overlay create 23 delete 23 print 23 P Paper properties set 15 paper size set print 37 paper source set 38 paper tray set 49 copy 26 paper type set print 37 poster print 20 PostScript driver installing 24 print document 13 fit to page 21 from Macintosh 44 from Windows 13 N up Macintosh 47 Windows 19 overlay 2
72. the printing file in the HDD User ID This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Job Name This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Samsung Tab Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the driver If your computer is connected to the Internet you can have access to following services Click the Samsung tab to display the options Help This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a keyword Service e Buy Supplies This option allows you to order supplies on line e Samsung Website This option directly connects you to Samsung Website e Registration This option allows you to register your machine e Check for updates This option allows you to download updates for your printer driver Using a Favorite Setting The Presets option which is visible on each preferences tab except for Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use To save a Presets item 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box gt Printing Preferences PIR Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung 210 x 297 mm i Watermark None k Q inch Overlay Text None se Output Options Print Order Normal v fontta Job Settings CL IT 3 Click Save When you save Presets
73. to Server 2003 Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2 GB Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentium IV 2 GH2 2048 MB Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB Vista 1024 MB Getting Started 26 REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED Linux ITEM REQUIREMENTS OS FREE HDD CPU RAM SPACE Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 1 GB 16 GB bit or 64 bit processor 2 GB or higher e Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Pentium IV 1 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 GHz x86 or 2048 MB R2 1 4GHz x64 processors 2GHz or faster Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64bit Fedora Core 2 9 32 64bit SUSE Linux 9 1 32bit SUSE Linux 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 0 32 64bit Mandrake 9 2 32bit 10 0 10 1 32 64bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 2008 32 64bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7 10 8 04 32 64bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64bit Debian 3 1 4 0 32 64bit iY e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software e Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz IntelCore2 RAM 512 MB 1024 MB free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB iY e It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with l
74. to copy several ID cards on a paper or adjust the copying position of the page follow the next steps Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people s driver s license cards 100mm X 80mm in one page 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup gt Manual ID Copy Setup Press the number from the template list table Press Edit Template O a A W Selec the appropriate option values and press OK e Template Name Enter the template name e Scan Position Select the position for scanning You should select the largest scanning position out of the originals LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 000mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 110mm Y 090mm e Number of Images Select how many images are on a page select number 4 e Image Position Select the position of a page which images are on If you choose to copy four images you have to select four positions here First Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 100mm Second Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 100mm Third Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 230mm Forth Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 230mm 7 Press OK the template you have saved will be shown in the template list table 8 P
75. to duplex print order If this option does not appear your machine does not have this feature e Fit to Page This setting allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document 46 Optional Finisher Printer Samsu rity SCX 6545 Series ta fa Presets Standard x E Copies 1 4Collated _ Two Sided Pages All CFom 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad LS 0 26 by 11 69 inches Orientation TF fla Printer Features EI Feature Sets Optional Fin aher b3 staple None a Lafi kh Bequest Cert Ko Offset L j 7 Pore Supplies Low Cancel GePrinte A Mac OS 10 5 Staple Do the stapling on the printouts e Request Offset If you want the printouts to be sorted the same way as the original the machine places printout sets slightly offset from one another Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages 1 From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Printer Samsung SCX 6545 Series fa Peesets Standard ma taj Copies
76. watermark See Watermark copying on page 48 e Overlay Prints an image with the image previously stored in your machine See Overlay copying on page 49 e Auto Crop Prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin See Auto crop copying on page 49 Image tab e Erase Edge Allows you to erase punch holes staple marks and fold creases along any of the four documents edges See Erasing edges on page 48 e Erase Background Prints an image with no background See Erasing background images on page 48 e Margin Shift Creates a binding edge for the document See Shifting margins on page 48 COPYING ORIGINALS This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals 1 Press Copy from the Main screen 2 Place originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more See Changing the size of originals on page 42 see Copying on both sides of originals Duplex on page 43 4 Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen 5 Enter the number of copies using the number keypad if necessary Z If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than two copies the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time if you select No the machine starts c
77. you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Please contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket gn Important warning You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Elec
78. your intervention See Delaying a fax transmission on page 63 e Priority Send Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations See Sending a priority fax on page 64 e Polling Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender s absence or vice versa In order to use the polling function the originals must be previously stored in the machine See Using the polling option on page 67 e Mailbox Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine memory which are ready to be polled You can use a mailbox on the Same machine you are using or the one on a remote machine Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number name and password See Using Mailbox on page 68 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Image tab a Ready to bax J e Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned See Original Type on page 65 e Darkness Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax See Darkness on page 65 e Erase Background Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as in newspaper originals See Erase Background on page 65 e Color Mode Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or color See Color Mode on page 66 e Back Returns to the Basic tab SENDING A FAX This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission When you place the originals you can use either the DADF or the scann
79. your printing needs Recognizing that each user may have different requirements however Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine s capabilities This chapter includes e Precautions to take when installing accessories e Installing a memory DIMM PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING ACCESSORIES e Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories e Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk around before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM slot Use this DIMM slot to install additional memory Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM See Memory module on page 121 Installing a memory module 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Open the contr
80. your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches 4 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture Scanning 30 5 Click Next 6 Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture 7 Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer Windows Vista 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Scanners and Cameras 3 Click on Scan a document or picture Then Windows Fax and Scan application is opened automatically NOTE e To view scanners user can click on View scanners and cameras If there is not Scan a document or picture open the MS paint program and click From Scanner or Camera on File menu 4 Click Scan and then scan driver is opened 5 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 6 Click Scan NOTE If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel button on the Scanners and Cameras Wizard Windows 7 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers 3 Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes
81. 1 i Collated _ Two Sided Pages All Ci From 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad 009 6 26 by 1159 inches Two Sided OF Reverse Page Orientation 7 Pore Supplies Low Cancel eePrintes A Mac OS 10 5 3 Select the other options you want to use 4 Click Print then machine prints the selected number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper 47 Printing on both sides of paper You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are as follows e Long edge binding This option is the conventional layout used in book binding e Short edge binding This option is the type often used with calendars From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation Select a binding orientation from Two Sided option Select the other options you want to use oF O N Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper Printer Samsung GEK 6545 Series fa Presets Shndard aj Copies 1 ACoilared _ Two Sided Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad 4 6 26 by 11 89 inches Dren tation Te Taya I Pages per Sheer TI NG 7 Pore Supplies Low A Mac OS 10 5 CAUTION If you print more than 2 copies the first copy and the second copy might print on same sheet of pape
82. 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Machine Details SENDING THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER NOTIFICATION You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is almost over and needs to be reordered 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Imaging Unit Reorder Notification 4 Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not and press Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK SENDING THE TONER REORDER NOTIFICATION You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to be reordered 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification Cleaning your machine Maintaining the Toner cartridge Maintaining the imaging unit Maintenance Parts Managing your machine from the website 4 Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not and press Toner Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job Press Document Box on the Main screen If the screen displays an
83. 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer Resolution yen 300 dr Original Size The machine senses and determines the size of the original Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK E ta 26 Laga JS Bb Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK a Text Photo Photo Slalemenl e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK Color aa F Gray NB e Color Uses color to displa
84. 3 poster 22 PRN 14 scaling 21 watermark 22 print resolution 38 printer driver install Linux 33 printer preferences using help 17 printer properties Linux 37 printer properties set Macintosh 44 Windows 14 24 printer software install Macintosh 41 Windows 5 uninstall Windows 12 printing booklets 20 double sided 21 from Linux 37 printing on both sides of paper Windows 24 R resolution printing 38 S scanning Linux 38 SmarThru 28 TWAIN 30 WIA driver 30 scanning from Macintosh 48 setting favorites 17 toner save 17 true type option 16 Smart Panel use 31 software install Macintosh 41 Windows 5 reinstall Windows 11 system requirements Macintosh 41 uninstall Windows 12 toner save set 17 TWAIN scan 30 U uninstall software Windows 12 uninstalling MFP driver Linux 34 W watermark create 22 delete 22 edit 22 print 22 WIA scan 30 50
85. 4 setting for SetIP PCL 6 POSTSCRIPT FEATURE WINDOWS WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Toner save O O O O Machine quality O O O O option Poster printing X Multiple pages O O 2 4 O per sheet N up Fit to page O O O O printing Scale printing O O Different source O X X O for first page Watermark O X X X Overlay O X X X Duplex O O O O Secu Print O O X O Scheduled Print O O X O Spool Print O O X O Proof Print O O X X Stapler O O O O a Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program like Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru For details please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program a The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper Introduction 24 getting started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes e Setting up the hardware e Setting up the network e System requirements SETTING UP THE HARDWARE This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Quick Install Guide Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps 1 Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold
86. 59 59 60 60 Resolution Original Size Original Type Color Mode Darkness Erase Background Scan to Edge Quality File Format PDF Encryption Scan Preset Printing a document Canceling a print job Preparing to fax Understanding the Fax screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Sending a fax Setting the fax header Sending a fax Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial Automatic resending Redialing the last number Delaying a fax transmission Sending a priority fax Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission Receiving a fax Changing the receive modes Receiving manually in Telephone mode Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone Receiving in secure receiving mode Receiving faxes in memory Adjusting the document settings Duplex Resolution Original Type Darkness Erase Background Color Mode Setting up a fax phonebook Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No Storing Group fax numbers Group No Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service Using the polling option Storing the originals for polling Printing Deleting the polling document Polling a remote fax Polling from a remote Mailbox Using Mailbox Creating Mailbox contents USING USB MEMORY DEVICE USING DOCUMENT BOX Storing originals in Mailbox Faxing to a remote Mailbox Printing a report after sending a fax Sending a fax in toll save time Adding documents to a reserved del
87. 96 96 97 97 97 99 99 YY About Standard Workflow Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen Workflow Screen Workform Creating Screen Various Operations with Workform Scan to multi destination Fax forwarding Auto redirection Delayed start feature Notification feature Approval feature Machine Setup Machine Status screen Admin Setting screen Browsing the machine s status General settings Copy Setup Fax Setup Network Setup Security Access Control Log Change Admin Password Information Hiding Optional Service Document Box Management Standard Workflow Management Printing a report Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Finding the serial number Sending the imaging unit reorder notification Sending the toner reorder notification Checking Document Box Cleaning your machine Cleaning the outside Cleaning the inside Cleaning the transfer unit Cleaning the scan unit Maintaining the Toner cartridge Toner cartridge storage Handling instructions Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Replacing the toner cartridge Maintaining the imaging unit Expected cartridge life Replacing the imaging unit Maintenance Parts Managing your machine from the website To access SyncThru Web Service contents TROUBLESHOOTING 100 Tips for avoiding paper jams 100 Clearing document jams 101 Misfeed of exiting paper 101 Roller misfeed 102 Clearing paper jams 102 In the tray 1 103
88. After installing the Unified Linux driver the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator 2 Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Refresh Printers Configuration button i Printers Classes Add Printer r Remove Printer Ports Configuration button Ne setae deraut 5top Test Properties About Help po Selected printer Local printer idle URI Exit ATAN _ Ha You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Using Your Printer in Linux 35 Printers Configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers Tab You can see the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window Unified Driver Cantiquratar jinbi contiguebon gt Wini Cares Mamaya Ko Shows all of the mao installed printer 7
89. Cancel The following five tabs display at the top of the window General allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration Connection allows you to view or select another port If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the printer port in this tab Driver allows you to view or select another printer driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options e Jobs shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list e Classes shows the class that your printer is in Click Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the selected class 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties Window 37 Using Your Printer in Linux Printing a Document Printing from Applications There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 From the application you are using select Print from the File menu 2 Select Print directly using Ipr 3 Inthe LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the Printer list and click Properties Printer
90. Configuration You can create edit or delete Mailbox Enter Mailbox ID Mailbox Name Mailbox Passcode by pressing options See Using Mailbox on page 68 77 If you set the Notification option to On you iY are notified when a fax is received in Mailbox See Creating Mailbox on page 68 87 Machine status and advanced setup OPTION DESCRIPTION Output Tray This feature lets you select the paper tray to use for receiving a fax Toll Save Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time for saving See Sending a fax in toll save time on page 69 Send Batch The machine asks you whether you want to add the documents to the reserved delay fax if the fax number you have dialed is same as the delay fax number See Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job on page 70 Fax Forward Settings You can forward a sent or received fax to other destination by a fax or an email See Forwarding a received fax to other destination on page 70 Fax Ending Sound This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on or off Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end of fax receiving See Setting up the end Fax tone on page 71 Caller ID If you have set this option the machine remembers the last twenty fax numbers a Private Automatic Branch Exchange NETWORK SETUP You may set up the network with the machine s touch screen Before doing that you must have the infor
91. Copy on the Main screen the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lost of copying options All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily If the screen displays an other menu press E to go to the Main screen Basic tab et Original NG mene Dupbax Eef i 1sided ob mare Cutpan 4 Uncollated o mara e Original Size Selects the size of the originals See Changing the size of originals on page 42 e Reduce Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image See Reducing or enlarging copies on page 43 e Duplex Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper See Copying on both sides of originals Duplex on page 43 e Output Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options If you install the optional stacker amp stapler then the staple related option appears See Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple on page 44 e Original Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job See Selecting the type of originals on page 44 e Light Dark Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark images See Changing the darkness on page 44 e Paper Supply Selects the paper supply tray e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use KY For details about how to u
92. Coupled Device module Resolution TWAIN standard 1 200 x 1 200 dpi Up to 4 800 x 4 800 dpi by software enhancement WIA standard Up to 600 x 600 dpi Scan to USB Scan to PC 100 200 300 dpi Scan to E mail Scan to Server 100 200 300 400 600 dpi Network Scan File format PDF TIFF JPEG Effective scanning length e Scanner glass 348 mm 13 7 inches e DADF 348 mm 13 7 inches Effective scanning width Max 208 mm 8 2 inches 127 Specifications Item Description Color bit depth e Internal 36 bits e External 24 bits Mono bit depth 1 bit for Linearity amp Halftone 8 bits External 12 bits Internal for Gray scale Grayscale 256 levels ate to the applications for scanning the maximum resolution might iffer b JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS OPTIONAL Item Description Compatibility ITU T G3 Super G3 Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or behind PABX Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG Tx only Modem speed 33 6 Kbps Transmission speed Up to 3 seconds page Maximum document length e Scanner glass 356 mm 14 inches e Duplex automatic document glass 356 mm 14 inches Resolution e Standard 203 x 98 dpi mono 200 x 200 dpi color e Fine 203 x 196 dpi mono 200 x 200 dpi color e Super
93. HESE INSTRUCTIONS 19 This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased Due to different voltage frequency telecommunication configuration and etc a AWG American Wire Gauge LASER SAFETY STATEMENT The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE LESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUC
94. ION RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIAGAO LASER INVISIVEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSICAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED ABNING UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPEN STRALEN AR FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE it a FAREA NGALAN 0 SAS SH Hog Sa TYO FOAL OZONE SAFETY During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is F advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area If you need additional information about ozone request your nearest Samsung dealer MERCURY SAFETY Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only PERCHLORATE WARNING This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR Manganese Dioxide Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate U S A only POWER SAVER ama This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use a178 Whe
95. In the optional tray 104 In the optional high capacity feeder 106 In the multi purpose tray 106 In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge 106 In the paper exit area 107 In the duplex unit area 107 In the stacker finisher 108 Understanding display messages 111 Solving other problems 111 Touch screen problem 111 Paper feeding problems 112 Printing problems 114 Printing quality problems 116 Copying problems 116 Scanning problems 117 Samsung Scan Manager Problem 117 Fax problems 117 Common PostScript problems 118 Common Windows problems 119 Common Linux problems 120 Common Macintosh problems ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES 121 Supplies 121 Accessories 122 How to purchase INSTALLING ACCESSORIES 123 Precautions to take when installing accessories 123 Installing a memory DIMM 123 Installing a memory module 124 Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties 124 Replacing the Stapler 125 Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit SPECIFICATIONS 126 General specifications 126 Printer specifications 127 Copier specifications 127 Scanner specifications 127 Facsimile specifications optional 16 contents GLOSSARY INDEX NtrOduCTION These are the main components of your machine This chapter includes Printer overview Control panel overview e Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons Understanding the Status LED PRINTER OVERVIEW e Menu overview e Suppli
96. It allows you to change the language that appears on the touch screen Power Saver You can reduce energy consumption by setting these features Power Saver has three options first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp under the glass And Power Save turns off all the fans within the machine after a certain time Low Power Save turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit See Using energy saving feature on page 29 Machine status and advanced setup_ 84 OPTION DESCRIPTION Tray Management This feature allows you to select the tray and paper you use for a printing job Paper size paper type and paper color options are adjusted here Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the window asking whether you set the paper size and type for the just opened tray Auto Tray Switch If tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size paper when tray1 is empty and this option is On then the machine continues printing with paper in tray2 e Auto Continue When the paper is mismatched meaning that tray1has filled with the letter size paper but the printing job needs A4 size paper the machine will wait for 30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized paper After 30 seconds the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized paper e Paper Substitution When the paper is mismatched this option sets the machine print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice versa
97. Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner 131 Glossary index A ADF load 33 adjustment altitude 29 admin setting 83 altitude adjustment 85 answering machine fax 64 authentication network accounting 89 printing a report 84 93 setting up 29 84 auto center 48 B Book copy 47 C checking stored document 94 cleaning inside 95 outside 95 scan unit 95 transfer unit 95 Clone copy 46 collated 44 color mode faxing 66 scanning 58 74 control panel 18 19 copy copying 42 covers 47 duplex copy 43 erasing background 48 erasing edge 48 making a booklet 47 poster 46 reduce enlarge 43 shifting margin 48 solving copy problems 116 text photo 44 the size of the originals 42 time amp date 86 transparencies 47 copy setup 86 D DADF cover 18 input tray 18 output tray 18 width guides 18 darkness copying 44 faxing 65 scanning 58 75 date amp time 29 84 printing date amp time in copied out 84 86 default settings 30 altitude adjustment 85 changing the default settings 30 energy saver 84 language 84 loading paper 30 machine test 85
98. Name Shows the workform name Input Shows the workform s input module name Transmit Shows the workform s transmit module name If two or more modules are added in transmit workform this column displays Multi without any icon Properties Shows the workform s perperties Create Creates a new private workform Delete Deletes the selected workform Edit Lets you to modify a workform Detail Shows detailed workform information Search Searches a workform with a workform name Task Imports a workform from USB export a workform to USB copy or move a workform to public workform It also makes a shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF e Execute Start the job defined in the workform Workform Creating Screen You can create a new workform To add a new workform press Create on the My Workform or Public Workform tab 4 You can create maximum 100 workforms Input Tab Total 3 Input Modules Settings 1 s e Input Shows the workform s input module name e Status shows the setting status To create a workform you have to set every mandatory items of the assigned input module Z After you do fill out all mandatory items the Save amp Execute and Save button are enabled e Settings Configures the setting values for the module e Next Goes to the next tab 81 _Using standard workflow Transmit Tab
99. Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Auto Crop Press On to activate this feature Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying 49 Copying scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer Then you can fax or email the files upload them to your website or use them to create projects that you can print This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned Tile to the destination This chapter includes e Scanning basics e Understanding the Scan screen e Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email e Using Samsung Scan Manager g The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced resolution SCANNING BASICS Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital files There are two ways to scan originals one is using the USB cable to directly connect the machine with your computer and the other is using the network scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination via the network e Samsung Scan Manager You just walk to the machine with the
100. SCX 6545N Series luti Functional Printe User s Guide imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product features of your new laser VIFF Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product Your machine provides printing copying Scanning and faxing functions With the machine you can SPECIAL FEATURES 9 Some features are optional Please check the specifications sections See Specifications on page 126 Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective output See Software section e Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 43 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 45 ppm e For duplex printing your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 38 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 40 ppm Handle many different types of printable material Ea e The multi purpose tray supports letterhead envelopes a labels transparencies custom sized media postcards and TITF heavy paper The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper e The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support plain paper in various sizes e The 2 100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in various sizes Create professional documents e Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Software section e Print Posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magni
101. Settings Watermark This option allows you to print text over an existing document See Using Watermarks on page 22 Overlay Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper See Using Overlays on page 23 Output options This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will print Select the print order from the drop down list e Normal This option allows you to print all pages from the first page to the last page Reverse All Pages This option allows you to print all pages from the last page to the first page Print Odd Pages This option allows you to print only the odd numbered pages of the document Basic Printing Print Even Pages This option allows you to print only the even numbered pages of the document Advanced This option allows you to set advanced output options for printing such as printing an information page and saving as a form to later use as an overlay Staple Do the stapling on the printouts Request Offset If you want the printouts to be sorted the same way as the original the machine places printout sets slightly offset from one another NOTE If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Job Settings This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving
102. Source Auto Select Type Printer Default g v C m Scaling Options Fit to Page None bd Percentage 100 g 25 400 Ca aa Copies This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can select 1 to 999 copies Paper Options This option allows you to choose paper tray you want to use NOTE When printing on an envelope select the Envelope tab to set the options e Size This option allows you to set the size of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use MP Tray when printing on special materials such as envelopes and transparencies Type This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved Plain Normal plain paper Select this type if your machine is monochrome and printing on the 60 g m 16 Ib cotton paper Thick 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ib thick paper Thin 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ib thin paper Cotton 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib cotton paper such as Gilbert 25 and Gilbert 100 Color 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib color backgrounded paper Preprinted 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib preprinted paper Recycled 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib recy
103. Specification on print media on page 35 e fan original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative Printing problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The paper keeps e There is too much paper in the tray Remove jamming excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the multi purpose tray e An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Specification on print media on page 35 e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove the debris e If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Transparencies stick together in the paper exit Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Check the power cord connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default printer Select Samsung SCX 6545 Series PCL 6 or Samsung SCX 6545 Series PS as your default print
104. TE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please tefer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 5 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 7 6 Ifthe test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 7 To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get
105. THE MACHINE S STATUS You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the machine 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab a Machine Status OPTION DESCRIPTION Device Info The sub options available are Service Center Registration and Contact Info You may enter information on service center and purchasing point Date amp Time You can set the date and time See Setting the date and time on page 29 OPTION DESCRIPTION Machine Details This option shows the customer support information on the email address and the phone number you stored from Admin Setting Also you can check the machine s serial number or the hardware and software information specification Print Report You can print various helpful and informative reports such as System Report Fax Report and Scan Report See Printing a machine report on page 94 Tray Status The screen shows the trays installed on your machine and their current configurations Select the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper type and size Default Settings e Default Window Set the first window that will appear on the display screen after turning on the machine or waking up from the Power Save For example if you select Fax as a default window the first window will be the Basic tab of the Fax feature In case you want to show ID Copy as a default wi
106. TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as several file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format BMP Scans original in BMP format The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Policy ee Pei Overwrite e Rename If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on USB as you store new Job information PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG and PRN files N If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Direct Print option supported file types PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are co
107. Using Smart Panel Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Using the troubleshooting guide you can view solutions for error status problems Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you want from the Options window 32 Using Smart Panel 9 Using Your Printer in Linux You can use your machine in a Linux environment This chapter includes e Getting Started e Installing the Unified Linux Driver e Using the Unified Driver Configurator e Configuring Printer Properties e Printing a Document e Scanning a Document Getting Started You need to download Linux software package from the Samsung website www samsung com printer to install the printer softwares Samsung s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers providing the ability to print documents and scan images The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents After the driver is installed on your Linux system the driver package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously The acquired documents can then be edited printed on the same local or network machine devices sent by
108. _Installer folder Double click the Installer OS X icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue N OF Bm Select Uninstall and click Uninstall Using Your Printer with a Macintosh 8 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue 9 When the uninstall is done click Quit 42 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Setting Up the Printer Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer the network cable or the USB cable For a Network connected NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Before connecting your printer make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 41 to install the PPD file on your computer Open the Applications folder Utilities and Print Setup Utility For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax Click Add on the Printer List e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up For Mac OS X 10 3 select the IP Printing tab e For Mac OS X 10 4 click IP Printer e For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click IP Select Socket HP Jet Direct in Printer Type When printing a document c
109. age tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Quality When you set Color Mode to Mono the Quality option is grayed out 75 Using USB memory device Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Shanna and Printing E cun Sample Scan Archival Record Custom a e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size e Archival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Format e PDF Scans originals in PDF format e Single Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e Multi Page TIFF Scans the originals in
110. ail e Remove All Erases everything in the input area e Address Inputs the recipient s address just by pressing stored addresses You can store frequently used email addresses from your computer using the SyncThru Web Service See Storing email addresses on page 54 e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use Z For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 77 e Back Returns to the previous screen If the network authentication is enabled the log off confirmation message popes up and closes Scan to Email Scan to PC If the authentication for network appears you have to enter user name and password to enter the Scan to PC screen e No Lists the number in order for application programs e Application Shows the available application programs from your computer e Select Moves to the application program you have selected 51 Scanning Advanced Image Output jaa Scan to PC Server Address e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but the back
111. all a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists please call for service Replace a imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 There is a problem in the control of LSU unit Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service There is a problem in the control of motor unit The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the scan sensor within the correct time after actuating the registration sensor Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Open the DADF cover and remove jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 100 MESSAGE Original paper is too long for scanner Check size Original paper jam in front of scanner Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path Original paper jam inside of scanner Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner Paper jam at exit of finisher Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper Jam in exit area Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jam inside finisher MEANING Oversized document or double feeding of Originals The originals are jammed in DADF Paper has jammed during dup
112. all current driver settings are saved To use a saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the Presets drop down list Using Help Click f from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any option The help screen gives detailed information about the printing features provided by the printer driver 18 Basic Printing Advanced Printing This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window Is similar e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM This chapter includes Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing e Printing Posters e Printing Booklets e Printing on Both Sides of Paper e Change percentage of your document Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size e Using Watermarks e Using Overlays Po Whi l D 19 Advanced Printing Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing You can select the num
113. als face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Send to Remote 69 Faxing Optional 5 Enter Remote Fax No Mailbox No and Passcode All these field are filled with information from the receiver NEN Reidy lo bax Reniota Fax Mo dan en iina No Polling Passcode NTH Lo J cao 6 Press OK PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is successfully completed or not 9 The detailed information is available in advanced setup part See Printing a report on page 93 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Print Report tab gt Report gt Fax Report gt Fax Send Report 4 Press On Admin Setting General 5 Press OK SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone fee If you send a fax after setting this feature fax data will be stored in machine s memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter passw
114. amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Accounting Prints the report of printing out Report count for each login user Standard Acct Prints the used amount of Usage Report Standard Accounting Standard Acct Prints the remained amount of Remain Report Standard Accounting Report Configuration You can print a report on the Report machine s overall configuration 93 Machine status and advanced setup Report Continue Fax Report Fax Report You can set to print the information of a fax reports Multi Send Report When you fax to several destination set this option to print a transmission report On is to print every time you send a fax the machine prints a confirmation report With On Error only when the transmission error occurred the report will be printed out Fax Send Report Appearance You can select whether the image on the confirmation report shows or not Fax Sent Received Report The machine stores the logs on each transmission and prints out every 50 logs with this option On It you select Off the machine stores the logs but does not print Fax Send Report The machine prints the confirmation report after each fax job only when you send a fax to one destination E mail Confirmation Report The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via Scan to Email On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed Off No report is prin
115. an use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the remote machine s Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours 4 Press OK USING MAILBOX You can store the original data in Mailbox since you are absent and the receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you This feature allows you to program up to 15 individual Mailbox Before you store the originals the Mailbox must be created Creating Mailbox 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter the password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press the down arrow to scroll down if necessary Press Mailbox Setup Press Mailbox Configuration Then the screen displays Mailbox List Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List 2 or po Print Report Copy Setup No Maiba List a Edit Mbox LJ 1 NEST Fax Setup ME Network Setup kddote Malbox 5 MES Authentication 4 MBA 6 MBS 6 MEG pp Primi Reparti rm maga Klia Nama Authentication Malbox Optional Service Passcode 9 Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel Up to 20 numbers you can enter 10 Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard It can be either alphabet or number up to 20 digits 11 Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000 then the machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox such as storing de
116. anation by feature contenis Copy Enters the Copy menu Fax Enters the Fax menu Optional Scan Enters Scan to Email Scan to PC Scan to Server menu Document Box Enters the Document Box menu See Checking Document Box on page 94 e USB When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows on the display screen e Logout Logs out from the currently logged in account e Toner info Shows amount of toner used e LCD Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen KJ To change the language that appears on the display USB guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the machine Follow the instruction on the LCD This icon appears only when you connect an USB memory module Z e cons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed out depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine e To switch the display screen and see other available icons press the right arrow on the display screen Machine Setup button When you press this button you can browse current machine settings or change machine values See Machine Setup on page 83 Mead This button allows you to move to Copy Fax Scan Document Box menu directly e Machine Status Shows the current status of the machine e Admin Setting Allows an administrator to set up the machine e Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also ch
117. and End Time e If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK gt Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email lf Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display 8 Press OK gt Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email If Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Receive Forward gt Faxing Optional 70 6 Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display e If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK Forwardin
118. and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company e Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc e UFST and MicrolType are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc e TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc e All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations e Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 4 02 samsung Printer Software section Software section Contents 1 Installing Printer Software in Windows installing Printer SotWATE aanak AA GANA AA AA AA AA 5 Installing Software for Local Printing 12 2 21212 2 Q Q XAA Aa 5 Installing Software for Network Printing 111111070 X a 8 Reinstalling Printer SOMWANC a aaa aasa asana anG AA a naa a AG 11 BUO ae BASA ANA AA AA NA AA NABA ENEAS 12 2 Basic Printing Printing a Document Uu aa 13 Prining oa Me PRN AA KA 14 PEN SUNOS ae AA E E E ttc AA AA E O 14 Sila a a E E AA AA PA 15 II LAO ma AA AA KINANA AA AA AA AA AA AA 15 GONG PAO a AALAGA AA 16 POVAN a TAO Ka AA AA ee ee PAGA 17 DNTISUMNG GA 17 Gi ale NW NG As ULA AA S 17 BINO RGI erei e E linea E eE E E EE E E E R 18 3 Advanced Printing Printing Multiple Pages on One S
119. and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers
120. anel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab gt Default Settings gt Default Option 5 Press the function you want to change and change its settings Prin Report Measuramenlg E ee ee lt Visine Home Home Wika For example if you want to change the default setting of the brightness amp darkness for a copy job press Copy gt Darkness and adjust the brightness amp darkness 6 Press OK IP setting using SetIP Program Windows This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following 1 Open Control Panel 2 Double click Security Center 3 Click Windows Firewall 4 Disable the firewall Installing the program 1 Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close the window 2 Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents the name of your CD ROM drive 3 Double click Application gt SetIP 4 Double click Setup exe to install this
121. ange the paper settings for each tray e Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Job Status button When you press this button the screen shows the lists of currently running jobs queued jobs and completed jobs Completed ids Current Job tab Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending Completed Job tab Provides the list of completed jobs Active Notice tab Displays any error codes that have occurred No Gives the order of jobs The job in No 001 is currently in progress Job Name Shows job information like name and type Status Gives the current status of each job User Provides user name mainly computer name Job Type Displays details of the active job such as job type recipient phone number and other information Delete Removes the selected job from the list e Delete All Removes all the jobs from the list e Detail Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the Active Notice list e Close Closes the job status window and switches to previous view Power Saver button When the machine is not in use save electricity with the provided power save mode Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode See Using energy saving feature on page 29 If you press this button for more than two seconds a window appears requesting that you turn the power off If you choose Yes the power is turned off Th
122. anning 8 Repeat step 5 to step 7 Z As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains you can add segments without any restriction 9 After adding segments press Print All ID card copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 1 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy Press Start on the control panel Then the machine starts scanning the front side da O 45 Copying 6 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying IZ e If the original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed e If this option is grayed out select the Duplex option to 1 gt 1 Sided the Output option to Collated Copying ID with the manual ID copy option If you want
123. anning 54 individual fax number 66 J jam clearing paper from the duplex unit area 107 clearing paper from the exit area 106 clearing paper from the fuser unit 106 clearing paper from the multi purpose tray 106 clearing paper from the optional tray 103 104 clearing paper from the stacker finisher 107 clearing paper from the toner cartridge 106 clearing paper from the tray1 102 clearing the original from scanner glass 101 tips for avoiding paper jams 100 jam clear document 100 JPEG 59 75 K keyboard 31 L language 29 LED Interrupt 21 Power Saver 20 Status 21 Linux problems 119 loading originals ADF 33 scanner glass 33 M Machine Info 83 Machine Setup 83 machine status 83 133 Mailbox creating Mailbox 68 deleting the data of the Mailbox 69 Mailbox List 68 Mailbox No 68 Mailbox Passcode 68 polling 68 printing a Mailbox 69 sending to remote Mailbox 69 storing the originals 68 Maintenance imaging unit 97 maintenance parts 99 toner cartridge 95 97 memory DIMM installing 123 memory module installing 123 ordering 121 message on the display screen 108 Mono 58 75 multi purpose tray 18 N network setting up 25 87 notification receiving a fax in Mailbox 68 N up copy 46 O OCR 59 75 On Hook Dial sending a fax 63 optional service 91 92 optional tray 18 121 Original size copying 42 scanning 57 74 Original type copying 44 faxing 65 scanning 58 74 originals jam c
124. aration Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock or custom sized materials Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or 356 mm long In the software application set margins at least 6 4 mm away from the edges of the material 37 Loading originals and print media MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Preprinted Letterhead must be printed with heat resistant ink paper that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 126 Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality CHANGING THE SIZE OF
125. arge scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE You have to install the machine software for printing The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs iY e The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable refer to Software section e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system the printer feature or the interface in use See Software section Macintosh REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED OPERATIN G SYSTEM FREE HDD CPU RAM SPACE Mac OS X e PowerPC G4 e 128 MB fora 1 GB 10 3 10 4 G5 PowerPC based e Intel MAC 512 MB processors e 512 MB for an Intel based MAC 1 GB Mac OS X e 867 MHZ or 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 10 5 faster PowerPC G4 G5 e Intel processors Mac OS X e Intel Processor 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB 10 6 27 Getting Started 1 Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed See Setting up the network on page 25 All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation 2 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear
126. as special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item e The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SUSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher cannot scan via Gimp Front end Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detail information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use other kind of scan application refer to the Help for application encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print
127. assword on page 29 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Fax Ending Sound Press On Press OK 2 OL ha eS 71 Faxing Optional SENDING A FAX FROM A COMPUTER You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver See Software section Sending a fax from your Computer 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application 3 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window 4 Click Print or OK 5 Enter the recipients numbers and select the option Fax Options Fax Machine Model IP Address or Name 10 88 188 153 Phonebook Recipients Name Fax Number 55 Fax number gt gt iFFice Outlook Address Boo Fax Quality Standard OFine Cover Page Cluse cover page To Subject Message Notify me on delivery Heb Preview If you want to use a cover page check Use cover page Check Notify me on delivery when the fax delivered to the recipients successfully 6 Click Send Z For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help Checking a sent fax list You can check a sent fax list on your com
128. assword with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab 5 Press down arrow to switch the screen press Power Saver 6 Select appropriate option and time Print Report Scan Power Power Saver Tray Management Low Power kamara a Save itude Adjustment Qutput Options Power Save sul e Scan Power Save Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass e Low Power Save Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under 125 C and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit e Power Save Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after certain time 7 Press OK Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job See General settings on page 84 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab 5 Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray Management 6 Select tray and its options such as paper size and type 7 Press OK If the optional tray is not installed the tray options on the screen Is grayed out Changing the default settings You can set the default values for copy fax email scan and paper all at once 1 Press Machine Setup on the control p
129. ation mode The user ID and password regardless of router request is stored in an internal storage of the device The administrator can see the user Ave from the SyncThru Web Service gt SECURITY Security gt User Access Control gt User Profile menu This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data or change the password 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Security Print Setup ee Log Network Setup Security Pasaword Machine status and advanced setup 88 OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Network Authentication Authentication Method Continue It enables the network authentication mode When the users already belong to a server based networks the Network Authentication system can be simply configured with the existing server Then the user can access with the ID and password stored in the remote authentication server To use any features in Network Authentication mode the users have to get a certificate from SMB FTP LDAP or Keberos server defined in SyncThru Web Service Foreign Device Interface When you install the optional FDI kit select Foreign Device Interface Configuration Setup to activate it e Job Timer If there is not enough credit you can set the machine to cancel a job right aw
130. ay fax job Forwarding a received fax to other destination Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server Setting up the end Fax tone Sending a fax from a Computer Sending a fax from your Computer Checking a sent fax list About USB memory Understanding the USB screen Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to an USB memory device Scanning Scan to USB Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab Changing the scan feature settings Duplex Resolution Original Size Original Type Color Mode Darkness Erase Background Scan to Edge Quality Scan Preset File Format File Policy Printing from a USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device About Document Box Understanding the Document box screen Document Box Screen Box Adding Screen Edit a Box Screen Document List Screen Storing documents to Document box Storing documents from document box Storing documents during copy scan fax function 14 contents 15 USING STANDARD WORKFLOW 80 MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED SETUP MAINTENANCE 80 80 81 81 83 83 83 83 84 86 86 87 88 88 91 91 91 91 92 92 93 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 95 95 95 go 95 95 96 96
131. ay or wait a designated amount of time for a deposit e Print Job Control When it is enabled the both computer printing and copying are possible since the credit remains With Disable only the copy printing job needs the credit which means a computer printing a report or a fax job needs no credits e Inhibit Services When no credit is left the machine disables the copy job only with Copy Only With All Services scanning service and copy job are disabled e Internal Credits It is used when you cancel the job or when the job is cancelled by the device due to insufficient credits coin or is canceled by user s request If you select Enable the machine deposits a credit equal to the number of sheets that did not print out correctly then it prints next job for free for the amount deposited With Disable even if you cancel the printing job the machine includes jammed paper in the count and the cost of printing e Image Counter Depends on whether the machine counts blank white pages OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Accounting No Accounting It disables accounting features Method Network Accounting You can set the network account for users by using SyncThru Web Admin Service s job accounting plug in When the users performs their copy fax print or scan service job with the machine the account module records it You can see the report from the SyncThru Web Admin Service Standard Accounting
132. ber of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Basic tab choose Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop down list 3 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Page Order drop domn list if necessary Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 5 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 6 Click OK and print the document O IH wD Printing Posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop down list 3 Configure the poster option You can select the page layout from Poster lt 2x2 gt Poster lt 3x3 gt or Poster lt 4x4 gt If you select Poster lt 2x2 gt the output will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages a0
133. ble Copying on both sides of originals Duplex Press the Basic tab gt Duplex then use left right arrows to select Duplex value Z If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of originals the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Press more to see the detail values e 1 gt 1 Sided Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of the paper this function produces exactly the same print out from originals SE e 1 52 Sided Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper Ei 43 Copying 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans one side of the originals and prints on both sides of the paper but the information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 EHS 2 gt 1 Sided Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate sheet el 2 gt 2 Sided Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals a 2 2 2 gt 1 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180 el Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the
134. can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device When you scan a document the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution You can also customize your own scan setting See Changing the scan feature settings on page 74 A N If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Press USB from the Main screen Press Scan to USB 5 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Changing the scan feature settings on page 74 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning 7 After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine gt SCAN TO USB Basic tab Gut pul Filet ayy 20008 W Fiz ava poe08 Resolution Darectony Pai Nal Hip pama Fie 24570214 L k d Name The folder names on the USB memory device Date Tha date which folders are made Select Selects the folder whi
135. ch has been chosen from the Name New Folder Makes a new folder on the USB memory device Detail Views the details of currently selected folder or file Rename Renames the folder or file name 73 _Using USB memory device e Delete Deletes the folder on the USB memory device e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value File Name Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking this field e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab Output T e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size See Original Size on page 74 e Back Returns to the previous screen Image tab Cutput yaa E Mono oses CONE e Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo See Original Type on page 74 e Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode See Color Mode on page 74 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values See Darkness on page 75 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns See Erase Background on page 75 e Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge See Scan to Edge on page 75
136. chapter includes e About Standard Workflow e Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen ABOUT STANDARD WORKFLOW Standard Workflow is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs with pre arranged task sets called workform Standard Workflow makes it possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job workform Once you create a workform you can reuse the same workflow only with one touch operation INPUT TRANSMIT Email Scan FTP SMB server Document Box Document Box Fax Print Fax UNDERSTANDING THE STANDARD WORKFLOW SCREEN To use the Standard Workflow feature press Standard Workflow on the Main screen To switch to the other display screen press the left or right arrow on the display screen 9 01 01 2008 12 00 AMA e Various Operations with Workform Workflow Screen Favorite Tab Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform You can select a frequently used public or private workform and then the workform appears on the favorite workform tab Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving fax Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a favorite workform e Execute Start the job defined in the workform My Workform and Public Workform Tab ere las am Oe Selacind 17 Total 16 Workform Using standard workflow_ 80 Selected 14 Total 18 Wordorm baa 8 Type Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not
137. chnician when repair work is required Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used 13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e When any part of the power cord plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into the machine e If the machine has been exposed to rain or water e f the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed e If the machine has been dropped or the cabinet appears damaged e f the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance N 14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation 15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning If possible unplug the ZA AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm 16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine then it should be 16 AWG or bigger 17 Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord 18 SAVE T
138. cific time you want the fax to be sent You can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current time For example if it is 1 00 then you can set the time starting from 1 15 If the set time is incorrect the warning message will appear and the machine resets it to the current time 7 Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory Z To cancel delaying a fax press Off before sending is activated Sending a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Priority Send Press On Press OK 7 Press Start to start the urgent fax job DAAN Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Adjust the document settings in the Ima
139. ck Cancel Printing Files You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ipr utility allows you do that But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file 1 Type lor lt file_name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only lpr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first Just select any files you want to print and click Open 2 Inthe LPR GUI window select your printer from the list and change the printer and print job properties For details about the properties window see page 37 3 Click OK to start printing 38 Using Your Printer in Linux Scanning a Document You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop 2 Click the amp button to switch to Scanners Configuration 3 Select the scanner on the list Unified Driver Configurator gt _ gt Scanners configuration a Click your scanner Selected scanner Vendor Model Type a BELTVOALS exit When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically select
140. ck OK and print the document NOTE If your printer does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The printer prints every other page of the document first After printing the first side of your job the Printing Tip window appears Follow the on screen instructions to complete the printing job 21 Advanced Printing Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a page s content to appear larger or smaller on the printed page 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Paper tab 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate 4 Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options 5 Click OK and print the document Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document 1 Tochange the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Paper tab Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options or A O Click OK and print the document Us
141. cled paper Envelope 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib envelope Transparency 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib transparency paper Labels 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib label CardStock 90 to 163 g m 24 to 43 Ib cardstock Bond 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib bond Archive 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib If you need to keep the print out for a long period time such as archives select this option Advanced This option allows you to print the first page using a different paper type from the rest of the document by choosing the tray to use for printing the first page For example if you want to print the first page using color paper load color paper into the MP Tray and plain paper into Tray 1 Then select Tray 1 in the Source option and MP Tray in this Advanced option NOTE If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Scaling Options This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page This option can be grayed out according to the Layout Options setting in the Basic tab e Fit to Page This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size See Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size on page 21 e Percentage This option allows you to change the size of a page s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want See Change percentage
142. click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next This printer will automatically substitute fonts shown on your screen with similar looking fonts located in the printer To avold substitution 70 0 the Extras tab of the printer driver and do not check Use Printer Fonts Select a language trom the list below Cancel e The window above may slightly differ if you are reinstalling the driver 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next Select Installation Type em Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer o lA aripah for a Install softwares for a device that is on network C Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back New Cancel 5 The list of machines available on the network appears Select the printer you want t
143. close it 4 Click Next i Cancel e After connecting the printer click Next If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation The reinstallation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 5 Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next If you installed the printer software for local printing and you select your printer driver name the window asking you to print a test page appears Do as follows a To print a test page select the check box and click Next b If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If it doesn t click No to reprint it 6 When the reinstallation is done click Finish Installing Printer Software in Windows Removing Printer Software 1 Start Windows 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Maintenance 3 Select Remove and click Next You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually 4 Select the components you want to remove and then click Next 5 When your computer asks you to confirm your selection click Yes The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer 6 After the software is removed click Finish 12 Installing Printer Software in W
144. created with password by all users This means that the only users who know the password can access to the box and store their data A common box is provided by default Users cannot create edit and delete the common box When a user needs to store a job that is not assigned to a box i e fax receiving or PC printing in store mode the data will be stored in the common box by default You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in delayed mode printing proof page UNDERSTANDING THE DOCUMENT BOX SCREEN To use the Document Box feature press Document Box on the Main H to go to the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press F screen a 01 01 2008 12 00 AM 77 Using document box e Storing documents to Document box Document Box Screen 25 Ca Second Second 127 2008 25 a Third Third 1W 27 2008 pro T Fourth Fourth waow 2 a Fifth Fifth awana 3 iam Sixth Seth manawa 2 lm Free Space 1637 MB Total 8000 MB mod 116 Pile 0 MEI f Total t0 1496 dette tan e User Box tab Create the box where you can save documents such as the file you have printed sent by email or scanned When you create a box you can set the password to secure your box The box with a password is called Secured Box and without it it is called public box e System Box tab The machine provided
145. creen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Print or Delete 3 Enter Passcode 4 Press OK Polling a remote fax This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the remote machine 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Poll from Remote j gt Ready to Fax Z Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific time within 24 hours 3 Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on the control panel You have to be informed Passcode from sender with the remote fax machine 4 Press OK Polling from a remote Mailbox This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the Mailbox of on the remote machine Before you start polling you must be informed of Mailbox No and Passcode from the sender See Using Mailbox on page 68 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Poll from Remote f A h Ready to Far Stora Send to Remote Delay Sand bA baal EF J Fri E S es _ 1 Ea Ldete Pad from Hernots Polling wT 3 Dely Pol From Mailbox Prat Remote Ng 8x 3 Enter Remote Fax No Mailbox No and Passcode All these field are filled with information from the sender 2 Ready to Fax ire Bemnodo Fax Mo Dalay Sand he l Priority Send Miad Iyo Palling Passcodle Mailbox Z You c
146. croll down the list on the right and select Network Configuration Report 5 Press Print IP setting using SetIP Program Macintosh For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following 4 You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP 1 Open System Preferences 2 Click Security 3 Click the Firewall menu 4 Turn firewall off 4 The following instructions may vary for your model Starting the program Connect your machine and the computer using network cable 2 Insert the driver CD ROM and open the disk window Open the MAC Installer gt MAC Printer gt SetIP gt SetlPapplet html 3 Double click the file and Safari will automatically open then select Trust The browser will open the SetIPapplet html page that shows the printer s name and IP address information 4 Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon which is the second icon from the left in the application menu bar A TCP IP Configuration window will open paan 4 If the printer was not shown in the information row select the Manual Setting icon third from left to open the TCP IP Configuration window 5 Enter the printer s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding e MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it
147. d Driver Configurator 1112177777101 1a 35 Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 11112 a 35 MAAGA Ce AA 35 Scanners CONMQUIATOMN sasandalan Ea 36 Pons le GC AA AA 36 Configuring Printer Properties 1111111 37 panung A DOCUMEN naaa NAKA AA eee AA AA AA 37 ITEC KONKAPPIICANONG a cdenseansccetsansdaedeanscaeneaasdneceasesaqstmdtions a onctions aE Honctioks Soames DAGAN kana AA 37 PANUNG FIGO mam aNG AAP AA PAANAN PAPANG 38 SCANNING a Document Uu 1111 a NANEN EAEN EE EER BAA EESAN ENEDES aE eaS 38 Usma tine Image MANAG wara AA GA GA GAI EOE 39 10 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh asal AA 41 installing WS Pinter SOMWANG maka rinnoin EEEn rE IEEE Erir e E SO e 41 Uninstalling the printer software 111 111111 41 Seep tokin eda AE E N E E E AA 42 For a Network connected saman ANA AD 42 FOr a USB CONNEC CIO sasian E eai a ieii i Ei i e EEEE TOO 43 PUNUNG am GANAN AINA NAATASANG 44 PANINO A DOCUMENT ana NAA AA AA AA AN 44 Chahiging Printer AA AN 44 mla AA E EE ENE 46 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet Of Paper 11111 11 47 PATI on DOM SIDSS OF paper sensin ha ha 47 SCANN aea a ners ae 48 Scanning WiN USB iese AES 48 SCAMMIEG ALAALA AA aE 48 Installing Printer Software in Windows This chapter includes e Installing Printer Software e Reinstalling Printer Software e Removing Printer Software NOTE The following procedure is bas
148. d from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson th cryptsoft com ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written
149. d on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a New Page Overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use ina new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay 2 To save the document as an overlay access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 3 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Text drop down list The Edit Overlay window appears 4 In the Edit Overlay window click Create 5 Inthe Save As window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover 6 Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive NOTE The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a
150. d printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Loading originals and print media 36 MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand 180 C the machine s fusing temperature Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges Labels To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser machines When selecting labels consider the following fac tors Adhesives The adhesive material should be sta ble at your machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 126 Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bub bles or other indications of sep
151. display number 9 gt Recerne Start Code 0 9 a 0 fa 6 Press OK Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive Select On 5 Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the control panel Z To deactivate the Secure Receive feature press Off In this case the received fax will be printed out gt Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS Before sending a fax you can adjust the document seitings such as resolution darkness color duplex and so forth Refer to explanation of this section Z The document setting herein is for only current job If you want to change the default setting
152. dresses which are stored in Global in your machine are processed by the LDAP server 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Log in to the web site as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 5 Click Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt LDAP Server 6 Enter LDAP server and Port 7 Enter optional information 8 Click Apply The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the operating systems oa eo a aN Entering email addresses by the address book Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book you can simply enter email addresses 1 Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email SETE so ll EE YE nice The search window shows 2 Press the initial alohabet key of the address you are looking for Or press Search to specify the search criteria Total t0 a c Cance When the search is completed the screen displays the search results 3 Press From and enter your email address and press OK 4 Select the address you want in the right hand pane and the press To Cc or Bcc in the left hand pane 5 Press Apply Keep selecting addresses as many as you want 6 Pres
153. ds a new segment Cancel Remove all segments in the list and cancel the job 6 Press Add Segment 7 Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper 8 Press Start to start the scanning job 9 Repeat step 6 to step 8 Z As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains you can add segments without any restriction 10 After adding segments press Send All Setting up an email account To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 Click Settings gt Network Settings gt Outgoing Mail Server SMTP 6 Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 7 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 8 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication 9 Enter the SMTP server login name and password 10 Click Apply If the authentication method of SMTP server is POPSbeforeSMTP check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication a Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name b E
154. e e Imaging unit is worn Replace with new one appears on the display For ordering information for imaging unit See Supplies on page 121 Z To prevent damage to the imaging unit do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Replacing the imaging unit 1 Open the side cover 3 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a click to release the toner cartridge The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit 5 Pull the used imaging unit out 6 Remove the new imaging unit from its bag 7 Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge 8 Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times lt If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric N Do not touch the green part midside of the imaging unit Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area 9 Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place making sure not to touch the surface of the imaging unit 10 Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place 11 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a click 12 Close the front cover then the side cover N After replacing the toner cartridge wait for several minutes without powering off until the machine enters to standby mode Otherwise it may cause malfunction of the machine Mai
155. e Enter a new box name e Owner Enter a user name of a box Document List Screen You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box screen you can use the stored documents again Second Second waaa Third Third manawa 27 Fourth Fourth mizni za Bal Fifth Fifth TW27 2008 29 Saied 1 Total 10 8000 MB t GT MB Total 2000 ME paan a a nae con isis swaro Pit Em Document Name Shows the document s name Owner Shows the user name of a document Date Shows the date of a document stored Page Shows the number of total pages in the document Add From Scan Lets you add a new document from scanning Detail Shows a document s information Search Searches a file with a document name or an owner name Edit Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name Delete Deletes the selected document Copy Copies a selected document to another document box Move Moves a selected document to another document box Combine Merge documents located in two or more boxes Send To Sends the selected document s to a destination such as e mail fax server or USB Print Prints the selected document s out e Back Returns to the previous screen STORING DOCUMENTS TO DOCUMENT BOX This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive Storing documents from document box You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu 1 Place the ori
156. e File menu The Print window is displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application The basic print settings are selected within the Print window These settings include the number of copies and print range General Select Printer oy Add Printer C Print to file Preferences gt Make sure that your printer is selected Page Range All Number of copies 1 4 O Pages 1 65535 Collate 4 Enter either 4 single page number or a single OL page range For example 5 12 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window For details see Printer Settings on page 14 4 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window NOTE If you are using Windows Internet Explorer the AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen captured images or printing the image Click Start gt All programs gt your printer driver name gt AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is available for the download Printing to a file PRN Printer Settings You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access al
157. e PDF Scans originals in PDF format You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification To add the Digital Signature you have to create the certification from the SyncThru Web Service Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 And click Setting gt Machine Settings gt Scan gt Scan Security gt Digital Signature in PDF The Digital Signature can be used in the Scan to Server feature You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access You can set the encryption level password and access permission such as reading printing or modifying etc The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server feature See PDF Encryption on page 59 e Single Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e Multi Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as several file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format e XPS Scans original in XPS format K e The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode e The file format XPS cannot be showed in the Scan to PC mode PDF Encryption To encrypt your PDF files you need to set up parameters for the encryption level password and access permission etc Z The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server
158. e Serial Number IP Address Hardware Options Configuration Software Versions Tray Status Tray Status Paper Size Paper Type Print Report System Report Scan Report Fax Report Supplies Life tab Machine Info tab Machine Info tab Continued Usage Counters Total Impressions Black Impressions Black Copied Impressions Black Printed Impressions Sheets Copied Sheets Black Copied Sheets Printed Sheets Black Printed Sheets 2 Sided Sheets Copied 2 Sided Sheets Machine Info tab Machine Info tab Continued Black Copied 2 Sided Sheets Printed 2 Sided Sheets Black Printed 2 Sided Sheets Analog Fax Sheets Analog Fax 2 Sided Sheets Fax Image Received Analog Fax Images Sent Analog Fax Images Received Images Sent Network Scanning Images Sent Continued Email Images Sent Maintenance Impressions Black Maintenance Impressions Introduction_ 22 Admin Setting General tab Setup tab Print Report tab Page 84 Page 86 Page 93 Device Info Copy Setup Print Date amp Time Fax Setup Accounting Reports Default Settings Network Setup Report Measurement Security Timers Optional Service Language Document Box Power Saver Management Tray Management Standard Workflow Altitude Adjustment Management Output Option Contention Management Sound Supplies Management Machine Test Manual Image Overwrite HDD Spooling Stored Job File Policy Country Home Window Background Multi Bin Stamp U
159. e copy jobs into a single copy For example if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a copy job you can use this feature In the picture below each number means each segment order D Segment 1 from the DADF Q 2 Segment 2 from the scanner D glass Segment 3 from the DADF Segment 4 from the scanner glass Segment 5 from the DADF When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build Press On to enable job build function no NT O Ready to scan Your Job Build ograni Cines 001 b am Copying_ 44 e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then the user can select to keep copying or stop e Print Prints the sample page s of a segment to confirm the contenis e Delete Deletes a segment e Delete All Deletes all segments e Print All Prints all segments e Add Segment Adds a new segment e Cancel Removes all segments in the list and cancels the job 5 Press Add Segment 6 Place originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 7 Press Start on the control panel Then the machine starts sc
160. e mail uploaded to an FTP site or transferred to an external OCR system The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program You don t need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones Using Your Printer in Linux 33 Installing the Unified Linux Driver Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer Turn both the computer and the machine on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to install the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Click the i icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root tar zxf FilePath UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux root localhost Linux install sh NOTE If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen
161. e not received automatically e The receiving mode should be set to Fax e Make sure that there is paper in the tray e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the DADF or on the scanner glass e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 96 Samsung Scan Manager Problem Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Samsung Scan Manager does not work Check your system requirements Samsung Scan Manager works in Window and Macintosh See System requirements on page 26 There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it See Cleaning the scan unit on page 95 Fax problems The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator a
162. e previous screen 2 Press New 3 Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up keyboard and the fax number in the Fax No area using the number keypad on the control panel e ID Enters the name e Speed Dial No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows e Fax No Enters a fax numbers only the numbers with the area code if necessary 4 Press OK Storing Group fax numbers Group No 1 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Group 2 Press New 3 Press the input area in Group Dial ID then the keyboard pops up enter the name 4 Select Group Dial No with left right arrows Group Dial ID Grou Dial No bti noo kd ox coca e Group Dial ID Enters the group name e Group Dial No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows 5 Press OK 6 Select an entry from Speed Dial List and press Add Repeat this step until you added entries you need j 5 Heady to Fax Crop Dhol Echi emma AYA a PP G00 1 alis Speod Dial List a 199 Hyd 173465 189 Hyd 12345 24 Dehi 24 Dehiiz345 23 Bingi 123451 2 Don 125 21 Germany 346i Dy 20 Parisit K3 Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane Group list 7 Press OK to save the numbers Faxing Optional 66 Setting up a fax pho
163. ears To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly 119 Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not scan Check if a document is loaded into the machine Check if your machine is connected to the computer Make sure if it is connected properly if I O error is reported while scanning Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the Situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box will be displayed To identify the source
164. eature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Book copying Use this feature to copy a book If the book is too thick lift the scanner lid until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the scanner lid open This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Place the originals face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 2 Press Copy from the Main screen To remove shadows of a book edge press the Image tab gt Erase Edge gt Book Center and Edges Erase 3 Press the Advanced tab gt Book Copy 4 Select the binding option e Off Disables this feature e Left Page Prints left page of the book e Right Page Prints right page of the book e Both Page Prints both facing pages of the book 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Booklet copying The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper mi T 47 Copying Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 P
165. ecessary select a language from the drop down list 8 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer Click Next x Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer pacdverenovercossersorsevescesevesevetvecsencvosenees Typical installation for A fe 3 network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Neetsceennecsseesnesatoenseeseneuseesceeusesuneesscensel Custom installation fou can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next X Select Printer Port Pnmsunog Select a port that will be used for your printer f Local or TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC Add TCPAP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name a Update lt Back Cancel elf you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your
166. ed The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete If you are under the DOS environment the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly Suggested solutions Change the language setting See Changing the display language on page 29 The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and then back on again 113 Troubleshooting Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly you may notice a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page e The toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge e The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Specificati
167. ed If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF Automatic Document Feeder or face down on the document glass Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane Hg Scanner Properties Image Quality Color Composition Color 16 Million Colors Resolution dpi ila HI Page Format 44 210x297 mm 7 __4avaneed Drag the pointer to set e sc the image area to be Auto scanned iC amain Standard Job kai ih la Delete Save Save As K Default p arc Press F1 for Help 7 Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections e Image Quality allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image e Scan Area allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select from the Job Type drop down list For details about the preset Job Type settings see page 39 You can restore the default setting for the scan options by click
168. ed on Windows XP for other operating systems refer to the corresponding Windows user s guide or online help Installing Printer Software You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing To install the printer software on the computer perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on the printer in use A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation Installing Software for Local Printing A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer such as a USB or parallel cable lf your printer is attached to a network skip this step and go to Installing Software for Network Printing on page 8 You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method NOTE If the New Hardware Wizard window appears during the installation procedure click in the upper right corner of the box to close the window or click Cancel Typical Installation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically
169. ed software e Printer driver features Front view DADF document output tray toner cartridge 9 scanner lid imaging unit Control panel a The symbol is a mark for the optional device Rear view Extension telephone socket USB memory port EXT O Telephone line socket Power switch LINE USB port Power receptacle Finisher output tray Stacker amp Stapler e600 DADF document width Side cover guides DADF cover Multi purpose tray Output support Front cover Tray 1 Multi purpose tray extension Optional tray Multi purpose tray paper width guides dummy for FDI Foreign Device Interface finisher cover Stacker amp Stapler Stand Scanner lock switch 15 pin Finisher connection Stacker amp Stapler o 2 3 a network port 5 6 finisher Stacker amp Stapler 8 DADF document input tray 0o00 NGOs HAB OW Scanner glass a The symbol is a mark for the optional device Introduction_ 18 CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW Machine Setup Ea Interrupt DU ID HOG packs WXYZ8 KA Clear Redial Pause On Hook Dial PCID Power Saver no Clear All 10 10 CD Stop Start Job Status Machine Setup Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings See Machine Setup on page 83 Job Status Shows the jobs currently runn
170. eld 25 000 standard pages Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 OS compatibility e PCL Driver 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 e PS Driver 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS 10 3 10 6 Interface High Speed USB 2 0 High Speed USB 2 0 HOST Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Specifications 126 a Print speed will be affected by operating system used computing performance application software connect on method media type media size and job complexity b Please visit www samsungprinter com to download the latest software version COPIER SPECIFICATIONS Item Description Copy speed Up to 43 cpm in A4 45 cpm in Letter Duplex copy e Simplex to Duplex 1 2 Up to 38 cpm in A4 speed 40 com in Letter e Duplex to Duplex 2 2 Up to 28 cpm in A4 30 cpm in Letter First copy out time Scanner glass Less than 5 seconds e DADF Less than 8 seconds Copy resolution Scan up to 600 x 300 text text photo up to 600 x 600 photo e Print up to 600 x 600 text text photo up to 600 x 600 photo Zoom rate e Scanner glass 25 to 400 e DADF 25 to 200 Multiple copies 1 to 999 pages a Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS Item Description Compatibility TWAIN standard WIA standard Scanning method DADF and Flat bed Color CCD Charge
171. elect the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer Resolution g 200 dpa a 100 200 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray The following table shows detailed information feature resolution and file format options e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then the user can select to keep sending email or stop Delete Deletes a segment Delete All Deletes all segments Add Segment Adds a new segment FEATURE RESOLUTION DPI FILE FORMAT Scan to Email 100 200 300 400 600 PDF Single Page TIFF Multi Page TIFF JPEG Scan to PC 100 200 300 400 600 PDF TIFF JPEG Scan to Server 100 200 300 400 600 PDF Single Page TIFF Multi Page TIFF JPEG e Send All Prints all segments Cancel Remove all segments in the list and cancel the job 6 Press Add Segment 7 Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper 8 Press Start to start the scanning job 9 Repeat step 6 to step 8 As long as space remains on your device s hard drive you can add segments without any restriction 10 After adding segments press Send All CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job
172. en the front cover 3 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a click to release the toner cartridge 5 Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag 6 Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Maintenance 96 If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 7 Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine 8 Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place 9 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a click 10 Close the front cover then the side cover N After replacing the toner cartridge wait for several minutes without powering off until the machine enters to standby mode Otherwise it may cause malfunction of the machine 97 Maintenance MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT Expected cartridge life The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80 000 pages The screen displays Imaging unit is worn Replace with new one when the life of the imaging unit is almost ended Approximately 6 000 more pages can be made after the warning message related to the imaging unit but you should have a replacement imaging unit in stock Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment optional printing interval media type and media siz
173. endent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used on a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between n
174. er beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal matrix printer and page printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device indep
175. er glass See Loading originals on page 33 If the originals are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DADF first which has higher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Machine ID amp Fax No 4 Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number 5 Press OK Sending a fax 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 4 Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Z If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper select 2 Sided with left right arrows in the Duplex feature 5 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the number keypad on the control panel Or use Address on the right side of the screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers Faxing Optional 62 Fax No 319886187 ese 1012345678 Address 12 123456789 peada ruaro csc 6 To add a number press Add No 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinat
176. er in your Windows Check the machine for the following e The side cover is not closed Close the side cover e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 102 e No paper is loaded Load paper See Loading paper on page 38 e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed Install the toner cartridge or the imaging unit If a system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different printer cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the printer software See Software section The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine Is indicating a system error Contact a service
177. er password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears Use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Once the password is entered press OK Factory setting 1 111 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup 7 Select TCP IP Protocol e Apple Talk Protocol This protocol is widely used in Macintosh network environments e Ethernet Speed You can select the communication speed for Ethernet connections 8 Press IP Setting 9 Select Static and then enter IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway address fields Touch the input area then enter addresses by number keypad on the control panel oe ON a Print Report Copy Setup DHCP F Ahir CODD OOOOH CH Fax Setup oS ee Mal Gol Subnet Mask 00E OOO OHO work Setup BOOTP Auilhentication et Gateway donadon Se E sta ET ae Pi as nai Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure 10 Press OK iY You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThruTM Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com e SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your net
178. er smaller than 174 x 128 mm 5 6 x 5 8 inches or larger than 218 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Do not attempt to load the following types of paper carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper torn paper Remove all staples and paper clips before loading Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics To load an original into the DADF 1 Load the original face up into the DADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray 2 Adjust the document width guides to the paper size Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep it clean SELECTING PRINT MEDIA You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Print media that does not meet the guidelines Outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affec
179. es to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Order Staple Cartridge See Staple Cartridge on page 121 And replace it See Replacing the Stapler on page 124 MESSAGE Staple cartridge is not installed Install it in finisher System error Zzz Please turn off then on This IP address conflicts with an IP address already in use Check it Toner cartridge is not compatible Check user s guide MEANING The staple cartridge is not installed There is a problem in the system operation The IP address is used in other place elsewhere The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Install the staple cartridge following the steps explained on the back of the finisher door See Replacing the Stapler on page 124 If you want to continue the print job and disregard of this error message go to Admin Setting to adjust the option See General settings on page 84 Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine Toner cartridge is not installed Install it Toner cartridge is worn Replace with new one Toner is empty Replace toner cartridge Toner is low Order new toner cartridge Too much paper in finisher stacker Remove printed paper
180. ess Machine Status 7 Machine Status wo 0 0 Feed Roller Kit Tray 1 Feed count 0 Feed Roller Kit Tray 2 Feed count 0 Feed Roller Kit Tray 3 Feed count 0 LY e Supplies Life tab Displays the remainders or the usage count of the machine supplies Use up down arrows to switch screens e Machine Info tab Displays the detailed information about the machine and some options allows for validating your machine See Browsing the machine s status on page 83 83 Machine status and advanced setup Network Setup Security Optional Service Document Box Management Printing a report e Back Returns to the previous screen Admin Setting screen Gives you access to detailed machine settings When you press Admin Setting a login message appears If the administrator set the password you have to enter the password every time you want to use Admin Setting See Setting the authentication password on page 29 _ rz n a r d x bi _ _ e General tab Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as location date time and more See General settings on page 84 e Setup tab Sets the values for fax network and login Also you can set to enable the feature listed on the screen e Print Report tab Prints configuration or font list and displays a report of machine features See Printing a report on page 93 e Back Returns to the previous screen BROWSING
181. ety Information Printer overview Front view Rear view Control panel overview Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons Touch screen Machine Setup button Job Status button Power Saver button Interrupt button Understanding the Status LED Menu overview Main screen Machine Setup button Job Status button Supplied software Printer driver features Printer driver Setting up the hardware Setting up the network Supported operating systems Configuring network protocol via the machine System requirements Windows Macintosh Linux Installing the software Machine s basic settings Altitude adjustment Setting the authentication password Setting the date and time Changing the display language Setting job timeout Using energy saving feature Setting the default tray and paper Changing the default settings IP setting using SetIP Program Windows IP setting using SetIP Program Macintosh IP setting using SetIP Program Linux Understanding the keyboard Loading originals On the scanner glass In the DADF Selecting print media Specification on print media Media sizes supported in each mode Guidelines for special print media Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray Loading paper contents COPYING SCANNING 38 39 40 Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder In the multi purpose tray Setting the paper size and type Understanding the Copy screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab C
182. ex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Di
183. f the installation 7 e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next i Select components i Select components that you would like to install EE _ _ _ _ _ amp K7IKkK E K 7II7KK K K _ E E E EIX Chanae Destination Folder J Select components that you would like to install er lt Back New Cancel NOTE You can change the desired installation folder by clicking Browse 7 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test 9 page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 9 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish MM Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Revccesenccocvanccscescnsesssccnsccescocereuneaseaseane Installing Printer Software in Windows In
184. f the photosensitive drum in the cartridge e Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges N Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner cartridge is completely empty e Toner is empty Replace toner cartridg appears on the display e The machine stops printing Incoming faxes are saved in memory At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine See Supplies on page 121 1 Open the side cover 2 Op
185. fied and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Software section e You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper See Software section Save time and money e To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper e This machine automatically conserves electricity by N DE om NIN IL e To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing See Software section Expand your machine s capacity e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their memory See Installing a memory DIMM on page 123 e A Network interface enables network printing Your machine comes with a built in network interface 10 100 1000 Base TX e Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Emulation PS enables PS printing Z RAN Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Copyright 1995 2005 Zoran Corporation All rights reserved Zoran the Zoran logo IPS PS3 and Onelmage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation 136PS3 fonts Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc substantially reducing power consumption when not in use Print in various environments e You can print with various operating system such as Windows Linux and Macintosh systems e Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy originals in
186. formation Confirm all the settings are correct 7 Close the SetIP program UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD You can enter alphabet characters numbers or special symbols using the keyboard on the touch screen This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters Ct E gt EHH ooeoooee asaan NGI UG KG KG UG NG IG GN IS O NG AG LL a KO x fye 1 Left Right Moves the cursor between characters in the input area Deletes the character on the left side of the 2 Backspace cursor Deletes the character on the right side of the 3 HENGE cursor 4 Clear Deletes all characters in the input area 5 Input area Enters letters within this line Shift Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase 6 keys or vice versa Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the symbols symbol keyboard Space Enters a blank between characters 9 OK Saves and closes input result Cancel Cancels and closes input result If you enter the email address then the keyboard for email pops up After you enter the address press OK to activate entered address Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From To Cc Bcc Subject Message in order Getting Started 32 oaaing originals ana p
187. g a sent fax to other destination by server If Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 Press OK Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server If Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press On 7 Press OK SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can be turned on or off 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication p
188. ge of the copies The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature e Hole Punch Erase Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies e Book Center and Edges Erase Erases shadows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of the copies This feature only applies when you do copying a book See Book copying on page 47 Z If you have set the Book Copy option to Off you cannot use Book Center and Edges Erase 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing background images This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the background as in newspapers or catalogs 1 Load the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Image tab gt Erase Background 4 Select the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Shifting margins You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page H Hi y c lt 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 2 Press Copy
189. ge tab and the Basic tab 3 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build 4 Press On to enable the job build function gt I Reniy bo scan ya Job Bold segmaenl LEI e Aad Seorent Cancel e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then user can select to keep sending fax or stop Delete Deletes a segment Delete All Deletes all segments Send All Prints all segments Add Segment Adds a new segment Cancel Remove all segments in the list and cancel the job 5 Press Add Segment Place the originals face up in the DADF 7 Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job 8 Repeat step 5 to step 7 As long as space remains on your device s hard drive you can add segments without any restriction 9 After adding segments press Send All RECEIVING A FAX This section explains how to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode refer to next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting t
190. ginals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 2 Press Document Box from the Main screen 3 Press a document box with which you need to store a document 4 Press Enter Owner Fra Fist 1 27 2008 E E E Second Second 1212008 26 g Third Third wanawa 27 Fourth Fourth tar awia Fl Mm Fifth Fifth TW27 2008 29 Sie Total 10 2000 MB Free Space 1637 MEV Total 8000 MB awa Sendo FT Print T Back 5 Press Add From Scan 6 Set the scan settings 7 Press Start to begin scanning Storing documents during copy scan fax function During copying scanning or faxing you can save the scanned originals to Document Box in your machine Using document box_ 78 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 2 Press Copy gt the Basic tab gt Saving to box Or press Scan gt Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to PC gt the Basic tab gt Saving to box Or press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Saving to box 3 Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard Then press OK 4 Select a destination box and press OK 5 Press Start from the control panel to begin a job 79 Using document box using standard WworKilow This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine This
191. he Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermaks list 6 When you have finished editing click OK or Print until you exit the Print window To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list 22 Advanced Printing Editing a Watermark 1 2 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermaks list and change the watermark message and options Click Update to save the changes Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Deleting a Watermark 1 2 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermaks list and click Delete Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 5 T amp gt w A WORLD BEST WORLD BEST Using Overlays What is an Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printe
192. he authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Fax Initial Setup gt Receive Mode 4 Select the option e Telephone Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start e Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode e Answering Machine Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax 5 Press OK When the memory is full the machine can no longer receive any incoming fax Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored in the memory Receiving manually in Telephone mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attache an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine See Rear view on page 18 If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax iY e f you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is c
193. he dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appropriate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Quality __ bos bag nana Ron When you set Color Mode to Mono the Quality option is grayed out Scanning_ 58 File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt File Format CI cE _ Single Page TEF XPS Multi Page TIFF
194. he user 5 Click on the Apply button 91 Machine status and advanced setup Log OPTION DESCRIPTION Job Log You can enable or disable job log to record job processing results You can print the records in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Job Log Report Operation Log You can enable or disable operation log to record various operations such as formatting the system creating document box deleting file etc You can print the records in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Operation Log Report Security Event Log You can enable or disable security event log to record history such as user authentication software upgrading access log exporting or importing data etc You can print the records in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Security Event Log Report Change Admin Password You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication Information Hiding OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Hiding Level Show All All information in Job Status is Setting Information displayed to all users Show Non Non secured information in Job Secure Status is displayed to all users Information The secured information such as Only secured received fax list or secured print list will be displayed only to the owner Show Own All information in Job Status is Information displayed to the owner Only Hiding Meth
195. heet of Paper N Up Printing 0 0 0 0 ccceccesssceeeeeesesesseeeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeesssseseeeeesssesenaes 19 Printing MeO SSC 6c 11 20 CMMI BOORIGIS maa AA AA 20 Printing on Both Sides of Paper sicsceseeseccsccsstceetesdgerseeceenedeeceecneecnenediacmsnenenananccectuneteecnesudaanebeleseeciotasatededeisasgsdesseedeoeeems 21 Change percentage of your document u 11111 1 lll 21 Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size a 21 Lasa WV ANAM c E A E sacrss secs st osee tk E E E E E E E E E 22 BE late AN IS DIMI WV ASTI AA AA 22 Creating a Walernmark aNG NAN AA AA AER 22 Editing a Watermark cssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesessesseseesseeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeessueeaaeaaaaaaesaaaaaaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeess 22 Deleting a Watermark sia steutnatatemunateseudaatadenumosescumnstadonuhatesudatadonuiedesoudnanmesesauonsuteheeueaheauetannntouiaeadnedatoniaiens 22 OOKO de VAS 23 MTT TS 20 AA E EE 23 Creating a New Page Overlay 11 1 200 a 23 TS Ne PAGE OVEN ee e ANGELA AGA 23 Dele TING a PAGS OV CM AY aa AKA GG 23 4 Using Windows PostScript Driver Pinter SS ENS nt cee esse stteciaernara els EE EEEE E AEE 24 PAV OU AD saertacacaationstionationsdidaadtaastaantaasitaad taqsidaaunos sonations venation Honstionstionetions yonstionstenetinastienctionetmeatenpeceitenacensitenstensitandtenntaantena 24 Paper Quay To D caste esse ce ecerto et pecs ne E E E E E ces E E E E E 25 USMO REID ena seer
196. her computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer 129 Glossary Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in
197. iented e None Flip on Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding e Flip on Short Edge This option is the type often used with calendars NI FE f A Long Edge an il all 7 a NT gt p Sz A Short Edge NOTE Do not print on both sides of labels transparencies envelopes or thick papers It may result in paper jam and damage to the machine Using Windows PostScript Driver Pages Per Sheet Using Help You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be You can click 7 from the upper right corner of the window and then reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print click on any setting up to 16 pages on one sheet Advanced You can select Paper Size Graphic and Document Options 5 al DEEN In Graphic ia Document Options H H L o h Cancel Paper Output This option allows you to select the size of the paper loaded in the tray e Graphic This option allows you to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs Document Options This options allow you to set the PostScript options or printer features Paper Quality tab You can select paper tray and media type amp Printing Preferences E3 La
198. ime 5 Select date and time using left right arrows Or touch the insert area and use the numeric keypad on the control panel 6 Press OK 4 To change the format of date and time press Date Format and Time Format Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the display refer to the following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the General tab Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language Select the desired language Press OK NN QO Setting job timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine exits the current location You can set the amount of time the machine will wait 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab Press Timers 6 Select System Timeout e You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour 7 Select On 8 Select a duration using left right arrows 9 Press OK gi Using energy saving feature The machine provides energy saving features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter p
199. indows Basic Printing This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in Windows This chapter includes e Printing a Document e Printing to a file PRN e Printer Settings Basic Tab Paper Tab Graphics Tab Advanced Tab Samsung Tab Using a Favorite Setting Using Help Printing a Document NOTES e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM e When you select an option in printer properties you may see an exclamationmark or mark An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and 3 mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using Refer to the User s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure Basic Printing 13 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from th
200. ing Default 8 When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel 9 The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab PAS a a If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar For further details about editing an image see page 39 10 When you are finished click Save on the toolbar Using Your Printer in Linux 39 11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 12 Click Save Adding Job Type Settings You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning To save a new Job Type setting 1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window 2 Click Save As 3 Enter the name for your setting 4 Click OK Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting 1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use these tools to
201. ing queued jobs or completed jobs Status Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 21 Display screen Displays the current machine status and prompts during an operation You can set menus easily using the touch screen number keypad Dials fax number and enters the number value for document copies or other options Clear Deletes characters in the edit area Redial Pause In standby mode redials the last number or in edit mode inserts a pause into a fax number On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line Interrupt Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job Clear All Reverts the current settings to the default values Power Saver Sends the machine into the power saver mode See Using energy saving feature on page 29 Stops an operation at any time The pop up Stop window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume Start Starts a job NG GB B006 00 0 GF O00 19 All illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models When you use the touch screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else Introduction CD 6 D B INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND USEFUL BUTTONS Touch screen The touch screen allows for user friendly operation of the machine Once e Shows Help You can find the expl
202. ing Watermarks The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you may want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer and they can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an Existing Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK and start printing NOTE The preview image shows how the page will look when it is printed Creating a Watermark 1 Tochange the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from t
203. ing electrical appliances Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine pe mm O If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information heed the safety information You may have misunderstood the operating instruction If you cannot resolve the conflict contact your sales or service representative for assistance Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners Use only a damp cloth for cleaning Do not place the machine on an unstable cart stand or table It may fall causing serious damage Your machine should never be placed on near or over a radiator heater air conditioner or ventilation duct Do not allow anything to rest on the power Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them CH bt Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock 0 Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords 1 Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings They may touch dangerous voltage points creating a risk of fire or shock Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine gt ae ee INE 12 To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble the machine Take it to a qualified service te
204. ing scanned Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option on the screen and press OK e Text For originals with text or line art e Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press the right arrow to enhance the darkness degree and press OK Light Dark po On Erase Background You can lighten reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appropriate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo Color Mode You can transmit a fax in color using this feature But this feature only applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select option and OK e Mono Transmits a fax in black and white e Color Transmits a fax in color Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually See Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial on page 63 SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK
205. ing the imaging unit on page 97 Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc e Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 35 e Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 Troubleshooting_ 114 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the cartridge contact a service representative After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Curl or wave e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl See Specification on print media on page 35 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the
206. ing unit and toner cartridge to reorder and resets the used fuser counter bias transfer roller feed roller and document feeder friction pad counter Machine Test The machine prints the test image patterns using Image Quality Test Patterns Multi Bin You can set the default mode for multi output bin from the following options e Mailbox Stacks the printouts in a bin that the user selects from the output options in the printer driver You can modify each bin s name from Rename You also can merge two or more bins from Link Setup By using Default Setup you can assign each job s default bin such as bin 2 for copy job bin 4 for fax job etc e Job Seperator Stacks the printouts in each seperated bin in sequence by job e Collator Stacks the printouts in the same order as the originals e Stacker Stacks the printouts in bins one by one When bin 1 is full printouts will be stacked in bin 2 77 You can only use this feature if you have NA installed optional 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox 85 Machine status and advanced setup OPTION DESCRIPTION Stamp You can print optional information such as ID Machine Information Date amp Time Comment and Page Number on the output paper for tracking e Items Select item s to print on each paper e Position Decide the position to stamp either Top or Bottom of paper e Appearance Decide the appearance of the text either Opaque or Transparen
207. input tray Then place the documents back in the DADF 101 Troubleshooting Roller misfeed 1 Open the scanner lid 2 Grasp the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 1 scanner lid If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 3 3 Open the white document background 5 Close the white document background and the scanner lid Then load the removed pages back into the DADF CLEARING PAPER JAMS When a paper jam occurs the warming message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF Paper Jam in tray 3 Paper Jam in tray 3 HCF Paper Jam in tray 4 Paper Jam in MP tray In the paper feed area tray 1 optional tray or multi purpose tray See In the multi purpose tray on page 106 See In the optional tray on page 103 See In the optional high capacity feeder on page 104 Paper Jam in exit area In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge See In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge on page 106 Paper Jam inside of machine In the paper exit area See In the paper exit area on page 106 Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper Jam inside of duplex path
208. int to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine e f your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC Ru 11C REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG FOR UK ONLY Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse
209. ion at the bottom of each page Secure Receive You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people This feature restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended If you select this option to On all incoming faxes go into memory A four digit Passcode is used when you want to print out received faxes in memory See Receiving in secure receiving mode on page 65 Machine status and advanced setup_ 86 OPTION DESCRIPTION Received Fax Printing When receiving a fax containing pages longer than the paper loaded in the tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine If this feature is set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages If you set this option to On and set the discard size to 10mm and the received data is longer then the currently set paper in the tray the machine minuses the data that would have been on the specified discard segment Redial The machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy You can set the number of redial attempts and an interval between attempts Selecting O for Redial Times means that the machine will not use this feature Speaker Volume This controls the sound when a fax actually starts to transfer data If this option is On the
210. ions IZ e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop before the machine start transmission Or press the Job Status button and select the job you want to delete press Delete e If you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page e While the machine is sending a fax you can not send an email at the same time See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 52 Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up into the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Press On Hook Dial on the control panel Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel e If the number is which you have dialed recently press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a fax number 7 Press Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine oo Pao Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually See Color Mode on page 66 Automatic resending When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts refer to the next following steps 63 Faxing Optional 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin
211. ions Press OK 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying CI a ON N Copying_ 48 Overlay copying If you scan and store the data such as format you can copy the original with the previously stored data NOORWND Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Overlay Press List Select a file name Select a overlay option e New Makes the new overlay When the file name pops up enter the file name e Detail Shows information of the selected overlay e Edit Modifies the name of the selected overlay e Delete Deletes the selected overlay e Apply Prints the originals with the selected overlay Print Prints the selected overlay Cancel Cancels overlay options you have selected Press Start on the control panel to begin copying If you have selected option New in step 7 the machine starts storing the new overlay by pressing the Start button Auto crop copying The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin NOORWN ly lt Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in
212. is button can also be used to turn the button on STATUS DESCRIPTION Off The machine is not in the power save mode Blue On The machine is in the low power save mode Blink The machine is in the power save mode Introduction 20 Interrupt button When you press this button the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job When the urgent copy job completes the previous printing job continues STATUS DESCRIPTION Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode Blue On The machine is in interrupt printing mode Interrupt mode is resumed at default value Off after the machine is shut down or reset UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED When the problem occurs the Status LED indicates the machine s condition by the light color of it s action STATUS DESCRIPTION Off The machine is off line The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically Green Blinking When the backlight slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer When the backlight blinks rapidly the machine is printing data On The machine is on line and can be used Red Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes The toner cartridge is low
213. it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer always store the cartridge e Inside the protective bag from the original package e Correct side up in a horizontal position not standing on end e Do not store consumables in Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F Humidity range less than 20 and not greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places A car for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface o
214. ity 26 Printing There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility From the Direct Printing Utility window 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility Or double click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The Direct Printing Utility window opens 2 Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click Browse 3 Select the PDF file you will print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Select Files section 4 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the next column 5 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the shortcut icon 1 Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer NOTE If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer opens Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section 2 Customize the printer settings for your needs 3 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added 2 Select the printer you will use Go C
215. jobs If this situation occurred try to release the port The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem The machine does not appear on the scanners list Check if your machine is attached to your computer Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box app
216. l of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP To create a file General Select Printer Add Printer Va Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use J If you access printer properties through the Printers folder you can view Status Read erence nG i i Pugak E pares additional Windows based tabs refer to your Windows User s Guide Comment ear ange a N OTES Number of copies 1 my 3 coleri 12 Diret page e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the OPages 165535 Cla CH oe printer driver Change all print settings available in the software gt i 4 2 a th fete ee application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in 2 Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click OK the Printers folder The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS
217. lear 100 loading 33 output options 85 paper changing the size 37 clearing jam 102 loading in the multi purpose tray 39 loading in the optional tray 38 loading in the tray1 38 paper feeding problems 111 paper type setting 40 phonebook fax 66 fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Service 67 polling deleting the polling document 67 polling a remote fax 67 polling from remote Mailbox 68 printing the polling document 67 storing the originals for polling 67 PostScript problems 117 Power Save 29 Power Saver 20 hardware 20 using power save mode 29 84 print quality problems solve 114 print report accounting reports 93 configuration report 93 e mail confirmation report 93 fax report 93 network auth log report 93 network configuration 93 PCL font list 93 PS3 font list 93 scan report 94 scan to server confirmation 93 Schedule jobs report 93 supplies information 93 usage page report 93 printing problem solving 112 USB memory 76 problem solve Linux 119 printing quality 114 problems copying 116 display message 108 faxing 117 paper feeder 111 PostScript 117 printing 112 scanning 116 touch screen 111 Windows 118 Q quality scanning 58 75 R remote code 86 replacing components imaging unit 97 toner cartridge 96 replacing stapler 124 Report 93 Resolution faxing 65 scanning 57 S scan preset 59 Scan to Email 52 confirmation 93 Scan to Server 56 confirmation 93 scanned file forma
218. leting printing receiving 12 Set Notification option to On if you want to be notified when a fax is received into Mailbox 13 Press OK Storing originals in Mailbox Since you created the mailbox you can store originals in it 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document faced down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Faxing Optional 68 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Store rp Retty lo Fax LIN 1 paga Store Send bo Renee Delay Send u a Delete Poll fron Remsste Polling parang E IES Debr Poll From Mailbox Part Remote bd 5 Enter Mailbox No and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox in page 68 Friority Send Pavecode ha ot cac 6 Press OK Z e Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox Press Fax gt the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Delete enter Mailbox No and Passcode and then press OK When the confirmation window appears press Yes to complete the job e Printing a Mailbox Press Fax gt the Advanced tab gt Mailbox gt Print enter Mailbox No and Passcode and press OK Faxing to a remote Mailbox To fax and store the originals in a recipient s Mailbox in this machine you can use the Send to Remote feature 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the origin
219. lex printing in the DADF The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the gate sensor within the correct time after actuating the scan sensor When the machine is on jammed paper is detected in the DADF The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the duplex sensor within the correct time when the document was fed the wrong way Paper jammed in the stacker exit part Paper has jammed during duplex printing SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 100 Check the document size whether it is supported See DADF document size on page 126 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 100 Clear the jam See Clearing document jams on page 100 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 100 Lift up the document input tray and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 100 Pull jammed paper from the stacker exit Clear the jam See In the duplex unit area on page 107 Paper has jammed in the fuser area Paper jammed in the stacker Clear the jam See In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge on page 106 Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b MESSAGE Paper Jam in MP tray Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper Jam
220. lity or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter LINE EXT 2 zY 4 x 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line PREPARING TO FAX Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to another If you want to add fax feature to the machine check the option lists See Fax option kit on page 121 and contact the purchasing point to order When you purchase a fax kit install the kit by following the steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit After installing the fax kit set the machine to use this feature See Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit on page 125 61 Faxing Optional Using Mailbox Printing a report after sending a fax Sending a fax in toll save time Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job Forwarding a received fax to other destination Setting up the end Fax tone Sending a fax from a Computer UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN To use the fax feature press Fax on the Main screen If the screen displays If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the Main screen Basic tab Fax No 918965187 W4
221. lopes e Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m or jamming may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation e Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds e Do not use stamped envelopes e Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials e Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes e Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope O 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable e Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page see General specifications on page 126 The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser e For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope e Avoi
222. low the standard tray to load an additional 500 sheets of paper See Supplies on page 121 4 Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreement 1 To load paper pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the side you want to print facing down 1 Full 2 Empty LETTERHEAD PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK PAPER 2 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the tray 1 See Setting the paper size and type on page 40 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC printing K e f you experience problems with paper feed place one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray e You can load previously printed paper The printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed Loading originals and print media_ 38 In the multi purpose tray 3 Load the paper The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper Tips on using the multi purpose tray e Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray e To prevent paper jams do not add paper when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types
223. ls the fax number and enters the Passcode when requested See Polling a remote fax on page 67 4 Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax Storing the originals for polling 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Store 67 Faxing Optional gt Heady lo Fax Store Poll frorn Remote Delay Send kasal Priority Send Dapa Ta Dhedeities Fores Polling Print 5 Press the input area then the pop up keyboard enter Passcode The four digit number which you have to inform the receiver If you do not want to set Passcode enter number 0000 here Then you can store delete print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode Z If you want to use the Mailbox refer to Storing the originals in the Mailbox See Storing originals in Mailbox on page 68 6 Select the Delete On Poll option If you select Off the sent fax data will be remained in the machine s memory even after it s printing If you select On the fax data will be deleted at the printing point 7 Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling 8 Give the Passcode to the receiver Printing Deleting the polling document 1 Press Fax from the Main s
224. ly If you do not use Also you can easily iY the optional tray move the cabinet with then Tall Stand is its wheels if necessary recommended In and store case you add miscellaneous items three optional like papers into the trays use Short cabinet Stand Stacker amp Stapler 500 sheets SCX FIN10S Finisher Staple Cartridge 3 x 5 000 staples per SCX STP000 package covers maximum thickness of 50 sheets 1 staple position SmarThru This feature lets you SCX KIT11S WorkFlow send additional information along with the scanned document to a specified network location ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER FDI Foreign This card is installed SCX KIT20F Device Interface inside the machine to kit allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine a Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany Italia France Sweden Denmark Finland Austria Switzerland Belgium Hungary HOW TO PURCHASE To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine or visit www samsungprinter com and select your country region to obtain information on calling for technical support Ordering supplies and accessories 122 Nnstaling accessories Your machine is a full featured model that has been optimized to meet most of
225. machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes With Comm the machine sounds only until the communication is succeeded No sound with Off option Prefix Dial This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five digits This number will be dialed before any automatic number is dialed User may set this to access a PABX example 9 or area code number example 02 When sending a fax there may be a job which has same recipient s number in delay jobs In this case the machine can send faxes to the same recipient in a batch Junk Fax Setup The machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers You can enter a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers Press Junk Fax Setup and Edit then enter the fax numer If you have set Caller ID enabled you can browse the last received fax numbers and select a fax number from the list Ring Volume This feature adjusts the ring volume When you select Off the machine does not ring Dial Tone Volume When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax you can hear a specific tone To adjust the tone volume you can use this feature Value 1 is the lowest volume Use left right arrows to adjust the value Mailbox Setup e Document Policy You can set the document stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents after Select Delete On Poll of each option to delete Delete On Print to remain the data e Mail
226. mail The maximum size is 1KB Z To delete previously entered contents press Remove All 6 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution e Duplex Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side only or on both sides e Resolution Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left right arrows Press the Start button to scan and send the file ce While the machine is sending an email you cannot perform a copy job or send a fax Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file And therefore you can send the document with a single email When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users Press Scan from the Main screen Press Scan to Email Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Advanced tab on page 52 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build 5 Press On to enable the job build function oN gt 53 Scanning gt j Reniy bo can yaar Job Eud segmenl Cor puri ri F PA a e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then the user can select to keep sending email or stop Delete Deletes a segment Delete All Deletes all segments Send All Prints all segments Add Segment Ad
227. mation concerning the type of network protocols and computer system you use If you are not sure which setting to use contact your network administrator to configure this machine network 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup iii baal Protocol B02 be anthentication opientserieo _ Sisi ine T OPTION DESCRIPTION TCP IP Protocol Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment 77 There are lots of parameters to be set KY therefore if you are not sure leave as it is or consult the network administrator Access Control OPTION DESCRIPTION iY e Using SyncThru Web Service administrators can classify Apple Talk For Macintosh network environments select this users into several groups according to each user s role Each Protocol option This option provides packet transmission user s authorization authentication and accounting will be and routing functionality for networking controlled by the group s role definition For example if a group _ A only has authorization to use the copy function users in Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed group A can only copy with the machine they cannot fax or scan You can set this feature from SyncThru Web Service Clear Setting Reverts the network setti
228. more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Renncccceresccscnccsensncscssnsscesencessenencceneaned 6 NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below Enalish x Cancel e f necessary select a language from the drop down list Installing Printer Software in Windows 4 Select Custom installation Click Next Select Installation Type PSnm
229. mpatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file BMP BMP Uncompressed TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline JPEG JPEG Baseline PDF PDF 1 4 and below To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it Press USB from the Main screen Use up down arrows until the file you want appears Select the file name If there is a folder select folder name and press Select Press USB Print Press Start on the control panel Using USB memory device 76 using document box This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine This chapter includes e About Document Box e Understanding the Document box screen ABOUT DOCUMENT BOX The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the hard drive Users can send the stored data to various destinations such as print fax e mail or an FTP SMB server The Document Box provides three types of boxes public T secured Ta and common Te The public box can be created by all users and all users can store data to public boxes The secured box can be
230. n a page as like the examples on Ul Border This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet Two Sided This option allows you to print on both sides of a paper See Printing on both sides of paper on page 47 Reverse Page Orientation This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution Select Graphics from the drop down list under Orientation to access the graphic features Printer Samsung GON 6545 Series 7 ee la Presets Standard y pra Copies 1 Collated _ Two Sided Pages All CFrom 1 to 1 Paper Sine BAO had 5 26 by 11 05 inches Orientation i e Graphies NO Resolution C 1200 dpi Best S 600 dpl Normal oes SAMSUNG 7 pore Supplies NO Low Cancel Print A Mac OS 10 5 e Resolution You can select the printing resolution The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer Samsung SCX 6545 Series bad al Presets Standard ro r Coples ES Mi Collated Two Sided
231. n the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks ENERGY STAR For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov RECYCLING DN Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner ta CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT WASTE ELECTRICAL 8 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal St Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems C7 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT Applicable in the European Union and other European count
232. nals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 e Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server e Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server e Changing the scan feature settings UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN To use the scanning feature press Scan on the Main screen If the screen If the message asking Auth ID and Password it means the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service See Security on page 88 Press Scan to Email Scan to PC or Scan to Server e Scan to Email Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination by email See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 52 e Scan to PC Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with the Samsung Scan Manager program See Using Samsung Scan Manager on page 55 e Scan to Server Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with SMB and FTP See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 Scanning_ 50 Basic tab This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server and Scan to PC s basic screen Scan to Email Remove An e From Sender s email address e To Cc Bcc Recipients addresses Cc is for copies to an additional recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be displayed e Subject Message Subject and message of the em
233. nd ask her him to solve out the problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine is not working there is no display and the buttons are not working e Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display shows the low Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax Job message delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Please call for service No dial tone sounds e Check that the phone line is properly connected e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone 117 Troubleshooting Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting For details about paper settings See Setting the paper size and type on page 40 Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are being used Z To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PostScript errors occur open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section Common Windows problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS PROBLEM
234. nd paper size will be changed automatically for your country 125 Installing accessories specifications This chapter guides you about this machine s specifications such as various features This chapter includes e General specifications e Printer specifications e Copier specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Item Description DADF Up to 100 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond DADF document Width 145 to 216 mm size e Length 145 to 356 mm Paper input e Tray 1 500 multi page for plain paper 80 g m capacity e Multi purpose tray 100 multi page for plain paper 80 g m e optional tray 2 3 4 520 multi page for plain paper 80 g m e optional high capacity feeder 2 100 multi page for plain paper 80 g m For details about paper input capacity see Specification on print media on page 35 Paper output e Face down 500 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib bond capacity e Optional stacker 500 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib bond Consumables 2 piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system e Scanner specifications e Facsimile specifications optional Item Description Imaging unit Approx 80 000 pages yield Memory 256 MB max 512 MB External 641 x 494 x 607 mm 25 2 x 19 4 x 23 9 inches dimension without optional trays WxD xH Weight 48 2 Kg including consumables Package weight Paper 5 4 Kg Plastic 1 2 Kg Duty cycle Monthly print volume Up to 200 000 pages a Sound Pres
235. ndow you need to enable this feature in Default Option previously e Default Option Changes all the default values for copying faxing emailing scanning and paper at once See Changing the default settings on page 30 e Home Changes the order of windows that will appears on the display screen 77 Depending on the optional kit you installed or the category you selected the selectable options on the display screen may differ Usage Counters You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far To print this report see Printing a report on page 93 Measurements This option lets you change the measurement unit to use mm or inch and set the numeric separation comma or period GENERAL SETTINGS Before you get ready to using the machine it is recommended to set up the machine parameters 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 3 Press the General tab Print Report Timers The machine cancels a printing job if data does not be received in specific time e System Timeout The machine returns to the default value after certain time the machine waits You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes e Held Job Timeout The machine holds a job for a specific time period You can set a time period for at least an hour Language
236. nebook using SyncThru Web Service You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer using SynceThru Web Service Individual 1 Open the web browser in your computer Enter IP address of your machine then SyncThru Web Service shows Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Address Book gt Individual Press Add Enter Name Speed No and Fax Number Press Apply Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an csv file pa SF aS Group 1 Open the web browser in your computer Enter IP address of your machine then SyncThru Web Service shows Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Address Book gt Group Press Add Group Enter Group Name and Speed No Add individual ddresses to the fax group Press Apply pa oS i eS USING THE POLLING OPTION Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document This is useful when the person with the original document is not in the office The person who wants to receive the document calls the machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the document be sent In other words it polls the machine holding that has the original To use this feature both the sender and receiver must have the polling feature The polling process is as follows 1 Sender stores the originals in the machine See Storing the originals for polling on page 67 2 Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver 3 Receiver dia
237. nel gt Samsung Scan Manager Z You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager window 3 Press Properties 4 The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings add or delete application program and format files You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab Local or Network 5 When setting is done press OK 55 Scanning Set Scan Button tab as Samsung SCX 6545 Series Property 10 88 189 158 Change Port Set Scan Button Scan Destination Available Destination List Front Panel Destination List Destination CJ Add Folder E Email Wy Microsoft Paint amp SmarThru Office m File Format JPEG Remove Application Scan Property Computer ID MANUAL Setting Save Location C ADocuments and Settings HJHiMy DocumentsiMy Pic 237 Resolution 300 dpi Scan Color Color Scan Size AA Default Cancel Scan Destination e Available Destination List Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC s registry Select the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel Destination List e Front Panel Destination List Shows the list of applications to open scanned image e Add Application Allows you to add application you want t
238. ngs to the default values Click Security gt User Access Control gt Authority 802 1x You can select the user authentication for network When the Single Sign On SSO feature is enabled users just need to log in to the service only one time Then the system mmunication communicatio automatically checks the user s authority based on the user ID For details information consult the network administrator and password The SSO feature is related to all of the security functions such as authentication authorization and accounting IPv6 Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network The SSO feature can be configured from SyncThru Web printing and managements Service Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an e IPv6 Activate When you select On the Host administrator See Managing your machine from the Name and Link Local Address will website on page 99 And click Security gt User Access automatically be entered into the address field Control gt Authentication gt Options e DHCPv6 Configuration If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network you can set one of the option for default dynamic host OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION configuration e Routers Use DHCPV6 only when Authentication No It disables Authentication requested by a router Method Authentication Method e DHCPv6 Addresses Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request Local It enables the local authentication e DHCPv6 Off Never use DHCPv6 Authentic
239. nnt media This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media LOADING ORIGINALS You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the DADF If an original is detected in the DADF the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 33 Loading originals and print media Loading paper Setting the paper size and type 3 Close the scanner lid IZ e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean See Cleaning the scan unit on page 95 e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the lid open In the DADF Using the DADF you can load up to 100 sheets of paper 75 g m 20 Ib for one job When you use the DADF Do not load pap
240. nstallation Click Next es SA Select Installation Type ah NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software Select type that you want and click Next button on page 11 C y 4 pea katatanon fora Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s p computer C u st O m l n sta ati O n Typical installation for a Install softwares for a device that is on network network printer You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP ad d ress Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide lt Back Cancel 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive 5 Thelist of printers available on the network appears Select the The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window printer you want to install from the list and then click Next appears a If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Select Printer Port am Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which Select a port that will be used for your printer represents your drive and click OK Local or TCP IP Port C
241. ntenance 98 MAINTENANCE PARTS To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired ITEMS YIELD AVERAGE DADF rubber pad Approx 50 000 pages Multi purpose tray rubber pad Approx 50 000 pages DADF feed roller Approx 250 000 pages Multi purpose tray feed roller Approx 200 000 pages Transfer roller Approx 125 000 pages Fuser unit Approx 250 000 pages Paper Feed roller Approx 250 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE WEBSITE If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via Samsung s SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyncThru Web Service to e View the machine s device information and check its current status e Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters e Change the printer properties e Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Ser
242. nter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 a If SMTP server requires SSL TLS connection enable Secure E mail Connection with SSL TLS Storing email addresses There are two kinds of email addresses Local on your machine s memory and Global on the LDAP server which differ depending on where they are stored Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine s memory and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain LDAP server Through the SyncThru Web Service you can easily enter and store email addresses from your computer Individual 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Address Book 5 Click Add 6 When the Add E Mail screen appears select the Speed No from 1 to 500 enter User Name and E mail Address Click Apply 8 Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Local gt the Individual tab N Group Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book Click Address Book gt E mail Groups Click Add Group Enter Group Name and Speed No Add Individual addresses to the e mail group Click Apply Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Group Global Email ad
243. o Server 3 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass 4 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 5 Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab 6 Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the SyncThru Web Service 7 Select the destination SMB server 4 You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP servers 8 Press Start on the control panel The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB FTP server s at once You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file And therefore you can send the document with a single access to the server When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users 1 Press Scan from the Main screen 2 Press Scan to Server 3 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Advanced tab on page 52 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build Scanning_ 56 5 Press On to enable job build function a Reniy bo scan yaar Job Bold segmaenl Cor puri ma pi bm Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you s
244. o install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing Update the installer from detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation lt Back Next gt Cancel e If you do not see your machine on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your machine to the network To add the machine to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the machine To verify your machine s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page See Printing a report on page 93 e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button Z If you are not sure of the IP address contact your network administrator or print network information See Printing a report on page 93 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the co
245. o use to Available Destination List e Remove Application Allows you to remove an item added by the user in the Available Destination List e File Format Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be saved You can choose among BMP JPEG PDF and TIFF gt en Property Computer ID Shows the ID of your computer Save Location Allows you to choose the location of the default saving folder Resolution Allows you to choose the scan resolution Scan Color Allows you to choose the scan color Scan Size Allows you to choose the scan size ADF Duplex Automatically scans both sides If your model does not support this option it will be grayed out e Show Preview Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan options You can modify the options before scanning e Default Allows you to go back to default options Change Port tab Samsung SCX 6545 Series Property 10 88 189 158 Set Scan Button Local Scanner Network Scanner Auto detection on the network O IP Address IP Address Location Local Scanner Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port Network Scanner Select when your machine is connected via network port e Auto detection on the network Automatically detects your machine e IP address Enter in your machine s IP address to detect your machine SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB FTP SCAN TO SERVER You can scan an image and send it to a ser
246. oaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ T XXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a prompily notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a compla
247. od Char Counts Of Instead of the job name and Seiting Information owner s name in Job Status you can see a sequence of asterisks characters Fixed Counts Except First Char The job name and owner s name in Job Status display as many as entered number of asterisks except the first character Fixed Counts The job name and owner s name in Job Status display as many as entered number of asterisks 7 OPTIONAL SERVICE When you want to add the optional features for this machine you have to install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those features Follow the next steps to enable those features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Optional Service Prini Report TES mx OPTION DESCRIPTION Public Box If you set this option to Administrators only only Deletion the administrator can delete the publicly stored boxes in User Box because the machine will asks the password of administrator Ea aaa aaa ita orn Jenene CIRES Sean to Email La Sean To FTP aa ua OPTION DESCRIPTION Copy Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main screen Analog Fax After installing the fax kit select this option Enable to use this machine as a fax machine Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu fr
248. odes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server Glossary_ 130 Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications
249. of print media e Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray e Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems See Selecting print media on page 34 e Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray To load paper in the multi purpose tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray and unfold the multi purpose tray extension as shown 2 If you are using paper flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading For transparencies hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems 39 Loading originals and print media 4 Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much or the paper will be bent which will result in a paper jam or skew K Depending on the media type you are using keep the following loading guidelines e Envelopes Flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side e Transparencies Print side up and the top with the adhesive strip entering the machine first e Labels Print side up and top short edge entering the machine first e Preprinted paper Design side up with the top edge toward the machine e Card
250. of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The document has printed but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS 10 3 2 Update your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3 or higher Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally at the Cover page When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader Z Refer to Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common Macintosh problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The printer does n
251. of your document on page 21 Basic Printing 16 Graphics Tab Use the Graphics tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs Click the Graphics tab to display the options shown below amp Printing Preferences PR Basic Paper Graphics advanced Samsung Font Text Eo Letter a ores Cail Text Black 216x 279mm Oih a ave Printer Settin Pig g o O On p Oot Presets Untitled Font Text Check All Text Black box to print all the texts in your document in solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Advanced e Download as Outline This option allows the driver to download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored resident on your machine If after printing a document you find that the fonts did not print correctly choose Download as Bit Image and resubmit your print job This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Download as Bit Image This option allows the driver to download the font data as bitmap images Documents with complicated fonts such as Korean or Chinese or various other fonts will print faster in this setting Download as Bit Image is useful when printing from Adobe programs e Print as Graphics This option allows the driver to download any fonts as graphics When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType font
252. ol board cover by grasping it and slide toward you 1 control board cover 3 Take out anew memory DIMM from the plastic bag 123 Installing accessories Replacing the Stapler Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit Holding the memory module by the edges align the memory module on the slot at about a 30 degree tilt Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other LL g Z The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM and its slot Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a click Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be damaged If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly carefully try the previous procedure again 6 7 Replace the control board cover Reconnect the power cord and printer cable and turn the machine on Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties After installing the memory module you need to select it in the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it 1 NO oP Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your computer For details about installing the PS printer driver see Software section Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Prin
253. ole 8 Click Apply Enabling network authentication by Kerberos 1 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 2 Select Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt Kerberos Server e Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers 3 Enter the realm used for Kerberos login 4 Select the IP Address or Host Name 5 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name 6 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 88 7 You can add a backup domain as a previous step 8 Click on Apply Enabling network authentication by SMB 1 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 Select Security gt External Authentication Server gt SMB Server Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers Enter the domain that is used for SMB login Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 7 Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step 8 Click on Apply 4 Users can add up to 6 alternate domains St ee Ng Enabling network authentication by LDAP 1 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website
254. om the scan screen Scan to Email Scan to PC Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it via network Scan to SMB Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from the scan screen Scan to FTP Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from the scan screen Manual Image You can set the machine to delete previous job Overwrite information on HDD as you store new job information Set this option to Enable go to the General tab gt Manual Image Overwrite press Start in the display to start the overwriting job Automatic Image If you select Enable the machine renews the HDD Overwrite memory when you save new job on it DOCUMENT BOX MANAGEMENT You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in User Box 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Document Box Management STANDARD WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard workflow provides 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management gt 4 Complete Box Ata Redlirection Notification Management Approve Uu Delauh Fir men Wa a Complete Report ey OPTION DESCRIPTION
255. on on print media on page 35 e If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver and refer to Software section respectively e Acombination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service representative e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Toner specks e The paper may not meet specifications for eee example the paper may be too moist or rough See Specification on print media on page 35 e The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Dropouts If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page e Asingle sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job AaBbUc e The moisture content of the paper is AaBbCc uneven or the paper has moist spots on its AaBbC surface Try a different brand of paper peaches See Specification on print media on ADULT page 35 e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Pape
256. on page 99 2 Select Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt LDAP Server Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers 3 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 4 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 5 Click Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt LDAP Server 6 Select IP Address or Host Name 7 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name 8 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 389 9 Enter Search Root Directory the top search level of the LDAP directory tree 10 Select Authentication method There are two options for LDAP server login Anonymous This is used to bind with null password and login ID Machine status and advanced setup_ 90 Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS Simple This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS 11 Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN 12 Select Match User s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute options are CN UID or UserPrincipalName 13 Enter your login name password maximum number of search results and search timeout K LDAP Referral LDAP client will search the referral server if the LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if
257. onnected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings e f your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring e f you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation e While the machine is receiving a fax you can not do the copy job Faxing Optional 64 Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing x9 once again To change the 9 X to for example 3 X follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Receive Start Code Select On 5 Press left right arrows to
258. ontaining many pages printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option Enter the machine s IP address in the Printer Address field Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name e For MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer Click Add For a USB connected 1 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 41 to install the PPD file on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder Utilities and Print Setup Utility e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For MAC OS 10 3 select the USB tab e For MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find the USB connection e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 click Default and find the USB connection 5 Select your printer name 6 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does
259. optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Settings tab and set the Tray option of the Installable Options section to Installed The machine does not staple correctly when It might take longer to print when you print a Try to print with the latest Adobe Reader program or print with turning on Print as printing more PDF file as an Image option from Acrobat than one copy image printing options It might take from Acrobat longer to print when you print Bi an rere a PDF file as an image collate option only in Window Macintosh The machine Turning off If you want to use the does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy with a collate option only in Linux collation options on applications including CUPS pstops collation option may solve this problem collation option go to printer driver s advanced option and turn the collation on Z Refer to Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages Troubleshooting_ 118 Common Linux problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print e Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator and switch to the Printers
260. opying originals Changing the settings for each copy Changing the size of originals Reducing or enlarging copies Copying on both sides of originals Duplex Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple Selecting the type of originals Changing the darkness Using special copy features Merging multiple jobs as a single copy ID card copying Copying ID with the manual ID copy option 2 up or 4 up copying N up Poster copying Clone copying Book copying Booklet copying Cover copying Transparency copying Erasing edges Erasing background images Shifting margins Watermark copying Overlay copying Auto crop copying Scanning basics Understanding the Scan screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email Setting up an email account Storing email addresses Entering email addresses by the address book Entering email addresses by the keyboard Using Samsung Scan Manager Set Scan Button tab Change Port tab Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB FTP server s at once Changing the scan feature settings Duplex 12 contents 13 BASIC PRINTING FAXING OPTIONAL 57 9 7 58 58 58 58 58 58 59
261. opying the rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order Because the default value of theOutput option is Collated 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Z To cancel the current copy job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY On the Basic tab of the Copy screen you can select copy features before starting to copy Z The Basic tab setting is only for each copy That means that the setting does not apply to the next copy job After finishing the current copy job the machine automatically restores the default settings after certain time Or the machine resume to default setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting See General settings on page 84 Changing the size of originals Press the Basic tab gt Original Size then use left right arrows to set the original size Press more to see the detail values Com ti am eue A ey f a 88 216 peta 216 poke AA Letter B bad e Custom Selects the scanning area of the original Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size e Auto Automatically detects the size of originals but this option supports onl
262. or more information click Help gt SmarThru Office Help Scan To FTP You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru Office 1 Select File gt Send to gt Send By FTP 2 Send By FTP window opens 3 Add your file and click Upload Email You can send email while working on SmarThru Office NOTE You need an email client program such as Outlook Express to send email in SmarThru Office Procedure for sending email may differ depending on email client program you are using Scanning 29 1 Select File gt Send to gt Send By E mail 2 Anemail client opens 3 Type in necessary information and send your email Fax You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office 1 Select File gt Send to gt Send By Fax 2 Send Fax window opens 3 Type in necessary information and click Send Fax NOTE For more information about SmarThru Office click Help gt SmarThru Office Help The SmarThru Office Help window appears you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program Uninstalling SmarThru Office NOTE Before beginning uninstallation ensure that all applications are closed on your computer 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers SmarThru Office Uninstall SmarThru Office 2 When your computer asks you to confirm read the statement and click OK 3 Click Finish Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software If you want to scan
263. ord and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Toll Save gt 6 Press On Copy Setup Zante a On Start Time Fax Setup kana net et on End Th Authentication that 7 Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left right arrows 8 Press OK 9 Press End Time and set the end date and time with left right arrows 10 Press OK 11 Press OK ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY FAX JOB You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Send Batch Press On Press OK e When you send a fax if a fax number is same as the number in delay fax the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to reserved delay fax a O Ea FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER DESTINATION You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or an email If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful l4 e When you forward a fax by an email you firstly set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service
264. order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize
265. originals and scan them from the control panel Then the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder When you install all the softwares in the supplied CD the Samsung Scan Manager is also automatically installed on your computer This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Using Samsung Scan Manager on page 55 e TWAIN TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process See Software section This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e Samsung SmarThru Office This feature is the accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents and this feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB cable See Software section e Email You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 52 e FTP You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 e SMB You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB server See Scanning origi
266. ot print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 7 It will take longer to print when L you print a PDF file as an image Refer to Mac OS User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages Troubleshooting_ 120 ordering supples and accessories This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine This chapter includes e Supplies e Accessories Z The optional parts or features may differ by countries Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country SUPPLIES e How to purchase ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out you can order the following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine Optional tray 2 3 4 If you are experiencing paper supply problems frequently you can attach an additional 520 sheet tray You can print documents in various sizes and types of print materials SCX S6555A TYPE AVERAGE YIELD PART NUMBER Toner cartridge Approx 25 000 SCX D6555A Imaging unit Approx 80 000 SCX R6555A High capacity feeder If you are frequently experiencing
267. ow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists please call for service Touch screen problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The touch screen does not show anything Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Paper feeding problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper is jammed during printing Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 102 Paper sticks together e Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray See Specification on print media on page 35 e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper See Specification on print media on page 35 e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight e If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 102 Paper does not feed into the machine Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See
268. paper 180 in the tray Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in printer properties e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 35 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper See Specification on print media on page 35 If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service Contact a service representative Solid Color or Black pages e The imaging unit may not be installed properly Remove the ca
269. phone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overl
270. printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide Installing Printer Software in Windows 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to 3 Click Next print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so J desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just cl ick Fin ish It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Select a language from the list below English Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Niccceseocsosnccesesececcseseensccssnnscsstencecsenenes Cancel T I dlike to print a test page e f necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Custom i
271. program 5 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation Starting the program 1 Connect your machine and the computer using network cable 2 Turned on the machine 3 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP gt SetIP 4 Click on the icon third from left in the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows e MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 Z MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine s network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report See Printing out the machine s MAC address on page 31 Getting Started_ 30 IP Address Enter a new IP address for your machine e Subnet Mask Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine e Default Gateway Enter ta new Gateway for your machine 6 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all the settings are correct 7 Click Exit to close the SetIP program 8 If necessary restart the computer s firewall Printing out the machine s MAC address 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Print Report 3 Press System Report 4 S
272. puter From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Network PC Fax gt Fax Journal Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent using USB memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes About USB memory Understanding the USB screen Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to an USB memory device ABOUT USB MEMORY USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device e Print data stored on a USB memory device e Format the USB memory device UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN To use the USB feature press USB on the Main screen If the screen When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows on the display screen Press USB Format USB Print or Scan to USB 28V 20210 po i Sean to USB Directory 23 4 2021 Fie3 24 6 20212 sad e USB Format You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device e USB Print You can directly print files stored on an USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG
273. r Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Scanning You can scan documents using Image Capture program Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program Scanning with USB 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture NOTE If No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem persists please refer to the Image Capture s help 4 Set the scan options on this program 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTES e For more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help e Use TWAIN compliant softwares to apply more scan options e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Scanning with network 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture Click Devices and click Browse Devices
274. r Supply Advanced tab Page 41 ID Copy N Up Poster Copy Clone Copy Book Copy Booklet Covers Transparencies WaterMark Overlay Auto Crop Machine Setup button Image tab Page 42 Erase Edge Erase Background Margin Shift Basic tab Page 61 Address Duplex Resolution Advanced tab Page 62 Original Size Delay Send Priority Send Polling Mailbox Image tab Page 62 Original Type Darkness Erase Background Color Mode Scan to Email Basic tab Page 51 Advanced tab Page 52 Image tab Page 52 Output tab Page 52 Scan to PC Scan to Server Basic tab Page 51 Advanced tab Page 52 Image tab Page 52 Output tab Page 52 User Box tab Page 94 Add Delete Edit Detail Search Enter System Box tab Page 94 Detail Enter USB Format USB Print Scan to USB Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel the screen displays three menus Machine Status shows the supplies life billing counters and reports Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Machine Status Page 83 Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit Fuser Kit Feed Roller Kit Feed Roller Kit Bypass Tray Document Feeder Roller BTR Kit DADF Friction Pad Kit Page 83 Machine Details Customer Support Machin
275. r tab and set type to Thick Paper Refer to the Software section for details e f these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS White Spots White spots appears on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine See Cleaning the transfer unit on page 95 Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface drum part of the imaging unit inside the machine has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU Contact a service representative Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change to a lighter weight paper See Specification on print media on page 35 e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading e Remove the old imaging unit and then install a new one See Replac
276. r to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide K Troubtesnooting Guide Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML ram Help N at rinter Setting e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the o UU supplied CD ROM g7 Driver Setting Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s Understanding Smart Panel The printer and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use Any printers do If an error occurs while printing Smart Panel appears automatically not have this feature showing the error Buy Now You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows or Notification Area in Linux You can also click it on the status bar in Mac OS X You can order replacement toner cartridge s online Troubleshooting Guide Double click this icon in Windows You can view Help to solve problems Driver Setting Only for Windows GO 11 09 PM You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your printer For details See Printer Settings on page 14 Click this icon in Mac OS X d Click this icon in Linux If you are a Windows user from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Smart Panel 31
277. racters and graphics The higher setting may also increase the printing time of a document Layout Options This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document e Single Page Per Side This option is a basic layout option This option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper e Multiple Pages Per Side This option allows you to print several pages on one side of a paper See Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing on page 19 Basic Printing 15 e Poster Printing This option allows you to print your document into a poster size document This option prints your document into several pages Paste printed pages together to form one poster size document See Printing Posters on page 20 e Booklet Printing This option allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper to make into a booklet See Printing Booklets on page 20 Double Sided Printing This option allows you to print on both sides of paper See Printing on Both Sides of Paper on page 21 Paper Tab Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications Click the Paper tab to display the options shown below 3 Printing Preferences PIR Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung pi s ri KS 210 x 297 mm i Number of Copies 1 a Qinch v pt i a Paper Options ng s Paper Envelope Size Ad v
278. ransparencies for presentations use this feature to copy the information Before you start this special copy job set the tray s Paper Types and Paper Size to Transparency See Setting the paper size and type on page 40 mm Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 Load the right sized transparencies into the tray you have set Set the paper type to Transparency Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Advanced tab gt Transparencies Select Transparencies option e No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Blank Sheet Places a blank sheet between transparencies e Printed Sheet Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency 7 Select media sources in case you selected either Blank Sheet or Printed Sheet Aa Pw 8 Press OK 9 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing edges You can copy the original without any edges or margins 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the originals face up in the DADF See Loading originals on page 33 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Image tab gt Erase Edge 4 Select the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Border Erase Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies e Small Original Erase Erases 0 25 6mm from the ed
279. rantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help A Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to oper ate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada FAX BRANDING The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a tele
280. rchival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen basic printing This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e Printing a document PRINTING A DOCUMENT Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use For details about printing see Software section CANCELING A PRINT JOB If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler such as the printer group in Windows delete the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista 2008 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 and Vista double click your machine 4 For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing
281. ress Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Booklet Press On to use this feature and select detailed settings for each option e 1 Sided Original Copies on one side of the paper e 2 Sided Original Copies on both sides of the paper 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying vie e N0 Z This feature is possible only with A4 Letter Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 and Statement sized paper Cover copying The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Covers 4 Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto you cannot use this feature 5 Press On to use this feature and select detailed settings for each option e Position Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front back or both e Cover Sheet Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided 2 sided or blank paper e Paper Source Select the paper tray where the cover sheet is loaded 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Transparency copying When you prepare t
282. ress and select Copy 9 Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy gt Manual ID Copy gt 10 Press the template you have saved from the template list 11 Press the Start button on the control panel now follow the instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images 2 up or 4 up copying N up The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper 2 or 4 up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF NI IL Il Mi MIN HIN 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab 5 N Up Select Off 2Up or 4Up e Off Copies an original onto one sheet of paper e 2Up Copies two separate originals onto one page e 4Up Copies four separate originals onto one page 6 Press Start on the control panel oF ON Z You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge for the N Up feature Poster copying Your original will be divided into 9 portions You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Each portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order This copy feat
283. ries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no gua
284. rresponding checkbox es and click Finish iY e If your machine does not work properly after the installation try to reinstall the printer driver See Software section e During the printer driver installation process the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine If you use a different Windows location you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete Getting Started_ 28 MACHINE S BASIC SETTINGS After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value find the altitude where you are using the machine 1 Normal 2 High 1 3 High 2 4 High 3 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 3 Click Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup gt
285. rt it completely 103 _ Troubleshooting In the optional tray This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the optional tray 2 Please refer to the next method for other optional trays since the method is same as the tray 2 1 Open the outer cover in tray 2 3 Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper In the optional high capacity feeder Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder i 2 Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder in this area stop and go to step 4 4 Pull out the optional tray 2 5 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine or if you do not see the paper J If the paper does not move when you pull in this area stop and go to step 6 6 Remove the paper in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly Insert the tray 2 and close the two covers re Troubleshooting 104 3 Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown pulling gently and 6 Remove the paper in the direction shown Pull it out gently and slowly in slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper order to avoid tearing the paper If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 4 4 Pull ou
286. rtridge and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing Remove the imaging unit and install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 35 Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 35 e Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative 115 Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal e You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around e The paper may not meet paper specifications See Specification on print media on page
287. run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next aaa g It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English i Cancel e f necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Typical installation for a local printer Click Next x Select Installation Type en Select type that you want and click Next button panenvcennpanvesnareenensedsscenccannesseoesnsassonses G ertian for a Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s Iioedsasdaseds eunsedsseerheansedbbodbinaabsdnsoaassaacad computer r Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel Installing Printer Software in Windows NO
288. s not work Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the printer cable is connected properly Make sure that the printer cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Configuration or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port In case of use of account feature make sure that you have extra scan count remained For example if you try to scan 10 page document while you have 5 scan count left the scan job would be canceled Troubleshooting 116 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The unit scans very slowly e Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed e Graphics are scanned more slowly than text e Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to
289. s printing performance speed may be enhanced in this setting e Use Printer Fonts When Use Printer Fonts is checked the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory resident fonts to print your document rather than downloading the fonts used in your document Because downloading fonts takes time selecting this option can speed up your printing time When using Printer fonts the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory If however you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen NOTE If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Toner Save This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality e On This option to allows the printer to use less toner on each page e Off If you do not need to save toner when printing a document select this option Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options Click the Advanced tab to display the options shown below amp Printing Preferences R Basic Paper Graphics Advanced samsung Aq C mm 210x29 7mm inch Watermark Watermark one 4 Text None v Output Options Print Order Normal v Job
290. s OK Scanning_ 54 Entering email addresses by the keyboard When you press the input field in the From To Cc or message input field the keyboard shows on the display screen The following explanation is the example that you are entering abcdefg abc com 1 Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email Press a b c d e f g Press Press a b c Press and press c O m NRN to enter contents in other fields press i Fom rm pate on the keyboard 6 Press OK after finishing all the contents USING SAMSUNG SCAN MANAGER If you have installed the printer driver Samsung Scan Manager program has installed too Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about this program information and the installed scan driver s condition Through this program you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer Z The Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window and Macintosh system If you use the Macintosh see Software section 64 The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access You can enable the secured scan feature from the SyncThru Web Service Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 And click Setting gt Machine Settings gt Scan gt Scan Security gt PC Scan Security 1 From the Start menu click Control Pa
291. sage Page Report When the display Are you sure you want to print it shows press Yes Job Status button This menu shows the job in process in waiting in completed and the notice message such as an error See Job Status button on page 20 Current Job tab Completed Job tab Detail Detail Detail Delete Delete All 23 Introduction SUPPLIED SOFTWARE After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer you must install the printer software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install OS CONTENTS Windows Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features Postscript printer driver Use the PostScript driver to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS language Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SmarThru Office This is the accompanying Windows based software for your multifunctional machine Samsung Scan Manager This program allows you to scan a document on your machine and save it to a network connected computer Direct Printing Utility This program allows yo
292. scan images Unified Driver configurator Scanner enniqerafinn ele Switches to a ii Scanners NG be i configuration ke Shows all of the installed scanners Shows the vendor model name and type of your Venas scanner e am o a e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document See page 38 e Drivers Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers Using Your Printer in Linux 36 Ports Configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason Unified Driver Configurator Port configuration eeeee idewimfp0 devimtp1 Jdewmfp2 Jdewmfp3 ea aa sw b gt idewmfpS devimfp6 fdevimfn ldewmtfp3 fdevimtpg Help tevi 4 Shows all of the available ports Switches to ports configuration Shows the port type device connected to the port and status Selected port Port type USB Device Port is unused an Exit anmam e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port Since the MFP device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is nece
293. screen SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING THROUGH EMAIL SCAN TO EMAIL You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by emall Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper 2 Press Scan from the Main screen If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service See Security on page 88 3 Press Scan to Email 4 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Advanced tab on page 52 5 Press the Basic tab to enter the email address Scanning_ 52 Adhanced Image Output CI i Saving to box Romero An e From Sender s address Touch From and then the keyboard pops up on the screen Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email addresses Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses easily See Global on page 54 e To Cc Bcc Recipient s email address manually with the pop up keyboard or by pressing Local or Global Local or Global addresses are pre loaded address lists from your computer or the LDAP server which is configured at Web UI See Global on page 54 e Subject Title of email e Message Enters the text which will be as the contents of the e
294. se the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 77 41 Copying e Changing the settings for each copy e Using special copy features Advanced tab ID Copy aa N Ulp Off Poster Copy a e Job Build Allows you to copy several pages or different types of Originals into a single copy See Merging multiple jobs as a single copy on page 44 e ID Copy Prints 2 sided originals on one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card See ID card copying on page 45 e N Up Prints 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper See Copying ID with the manual ID copy option on page 45 e Poster Copy Prints a large image into divided 9 pages See Poster copying on page 46 e Clone Copy Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page See Clone copying on page 46 e Book Copy Allows you to copy an entire book See Book copying on page 47 e Booklet Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1 sided or 2 sided originals See Booklet copying on page 47 e Covers Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray See Cover copying on page 47 e Transparencies Adds a blank or printed divider between transparencies within a set See Transparency copying on page 47 e WaterMark Prints an image with the added
295. see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop 3 Double click the SmarThru Office icon 4 The SmarThru Office appears For more information click Help gt SmarThru Office Help Quick Start Guide This menu displays direct buttons for some features The direct buttons include Categories Binder Life Cycle Scan and OCR Fix and Enhance and Samsung Website You can disable this menu by checking Do not show this diaglog again Ww Bk 8m G Scan and Fix and Samsung CR Categories Binder Life Cycle Eahanca Website Using SmarThru Office Scanning 1 Click Scan icon NOTES In Windows XP operating system you can use SmarThru Office launcher which is on the right end of taskbar to easily open the Scan Setting window e In other operating systems beside Windows XP click the SmarThru Office icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher EF n m EFE II a ma f Select Scanner Allows you to select between the Local or Network scanner Select Profile Allows you to save settings frequently used for future use Click New Profile to save the setting Scan Settings Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size and Paper Source Scan To Allows you to customize settings for File Name and location to send scanned data NOTE Click Advanced button to set more scan options 3 Set scan settings and click Scan F
296. side is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value Z For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 77 e Back Returns to the previous screen If network authentication is enabled the log off confirmation message pops up and closes Scan to PC Scan to Server oe sabat e SMB Sends the scanned file to SMB Press SMB for that option e FTP Sends the scanned file to FTP Press FTP for that option e No Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 e Server Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use 4 For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 77 e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab Cart pu per ke e Job Build Allows you to scan several originals and then send them in a
297. single email or send them to a server s at once See Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email on page 53 or See Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB FTP server s at once on page 56 e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size See Original Size on page 57 e Back Returns to the previous screen Image tab F 5 j Ready to Email Cut pari e Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo See Original Type on page 58 e Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode See Color Mode on page 58 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values See Darkness on page 58 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns See Erase Background on page 58 e Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge See Scan to Edge on page 58 e Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab r 9 Reach Do bmai e Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output See Quality on page 58 File Format Selects the file format of the scan output See File Format on page 59 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose See Scan Preset on page 59 e Back Returns to the previous
298. so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word
299. ssary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers address their devices via so called MFP ports The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device while another block is in use When you install a new MFP device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose I O port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP s functionality For MFP scanners I O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Configuring Printer Properties Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 3 The Printer Properties window opens Printer Properties General Connection Driver Jobs Classes Mame Location a pp zz Description Help OK
300. ssist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document OPENSSL LICENSE Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without 5 prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derive
301. stalling Software for Network Printing When you connect your printer to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the printer After you have assigned and verified the TCP IP settings you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method Typical Installation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English Cancel e f n
302. stinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another Glossary_ 128 An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based compu
303. sunod Select type that you want and click Next button Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer r Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network O Custom installatiori You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer en Local or TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC Add TCPAP Port Select a printer from the list below IF you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name Update lt Back Next gt Cancel Set IP Address NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end o
304. sure Level ISO 7779 b Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment rinting interval media type and media size ee c May be affected by operating environment optional printing interval media type and media size PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS Power rating 110 127 VAC or 220 240 VAC See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine Item Description Printing method Laser Beam Printing Power consumption e Average operation mode Less than 750 W e Power save mode Less than 30 W e Stand by mode Less than 120 W Printing speed Up to 43 ppm in A4 45 ppm in Letter Noise level e Standby mode Less than 37 dBA e Printing mode Less than 55 dBA e Copying mode Less than 57 dBA Duplex printing speed Up to 38 ppm in A4 40 ppm in Letter First print out time 8 seconds from ready Boot up time Less than 25 seconds from sleep mode The boot up time will be longer if data volume is a lot in the HDD Print resolution Up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi Effective output Printer language PCL 6 PS 3 PDF Direct V1 4 TIFF JPEG Operating environment Temperature 10 C to 32 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH Display wVGA 800 x 480 x RGB color Toner cartridge yield Average Cartridge Yi
305. t When you select Opaque the text background color is filled with opaque white COPY SETUP For copy output you can set up several options in advance 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup Prind Report Prinf Report Copy Satup fee SS Machine ID amp Fax Initial Fax NG Setup Secure Recea Fax Setup Network Setup Receive Start Recenved Fax Le Code Rang to Anawar Printing Authentication ErrorGomection maang ake el Receive Header Reda Optional Servi Z The fax options are different from country to country depending on the international communication regulatory If the display screen does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained herein it means that the grayed out function does not supported in your communication environment OPTION DESCRIPTION Machine ID amp Fax Enter the machine ID and fax number which will No be printed at the top of each page Select the country name This option usually pre set for user Receive Start Code This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine See Receiving
306. t 59 75 scanner glass loading documents 33 scanner lid 18 Scanner lock switch 18 scanning color mode 58 74 darkness 58 75 enabling the scan kit option 92 erasing background 58 75 file format 59 75 original size 57 74 original type 58 74 printing an email report 94 quality 58 75 resolution 57 74 scan preset 59 sending it via email 52 sending it via FTP 56 sending it via SMB 56 solving scanning problems 116 USB flash memory 73 78 serial number 94 service center registration 84 service contact numbers 135 SetIP linux 31 macintosh 31 windows 30 shifting margin 48 side cover 18 SMB 56 sound 85 speed dial no 66 Stacker 121 stand 18 121 staple cartridge ordering 121 replacing 124 stored documents 94 supplies browsing the supplies life 83 checking the supplies life 94 expected imaging unit life 85 97 expected toner cartridge life 85 management 85 Supplies Management 85 SyncThru Web Service email address 52 fax settings 67 SMB FTP setting 56 System timeout 29 telephone 64 terminal ID 86 TIFF 59 75 toner cartridge 18 toner reorder notification 94 touch screen problem solving 111 tray adjusting the width and length 37 optional tray 18 tray1 18 U USB flash memory printing 76 scanning 73 78 using SetIP 30 W Windows problems 118 134 contact samsung worlawide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung c
307. t Feeder Hard Disk Network Interface Enthernet 10 100 1000 Base TX wired LAN Duplex 2 sided printing FAX Stacker amp Stapler Finisher Stand Included O Optional Blank Not Available ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE SCX 6545N O O O This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media The following table offers the conventions of this guide CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine Start Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine 7 The date format may differ from function and feature Z country to country Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical Do not touch the green underside of damage or malfunction A N the print cartridge gt Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order Copy gt the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy The example means press Copy from the Main screen press the Advanced tab and then press Clone Copy Footnote Used to provide more detailed informa
308. t print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options zp _ It will take longer to KY print when you print a PDF file as an image The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use Your machine has an odd smell during initial use The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating After printing about 100 color pages there will be no more smell It is a temporary issue The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The printer cable is loose or defective Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduc
309. t the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper K e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Samsung has no control e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide N Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements Loading originals and print media 34 Specification on print media TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT CAPACITY Plain paper Letter 216 x279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches e 60 to 90 g m 16 to 241b 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond for the tray bond paper for the tray Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches a n al n to 58 lb 100 sheets of 80 g m
310. t the optional high capacity feeder 7 5 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 6 If you do not see any paper in this area stop and go to step 6 105 Troubleshooting In the multi purpose tray 1 Ifthe paper is not feeding properly pull the paper out of the machine In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the side cover 2 Remove the jammed paper in the direction shown 3 Close the side cover In the paper exit area 1 Open the side cover 2 Gently pull the paper out through the exit area Troubleshooting_ 106 In the duplex unit area If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly paper jam may occur Make sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly 1 Open the side cover 2 Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily Hl o ily 4 Close the side cover In the stacker finisher Paper jam in front of finisher 1 Open the stacker front cover 107 Troubleshooting 2 Press the right part of lever 1c and hold still then push the stacker to the left to release the stacker 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound click 5 Close the stacker front cover
311. t to multiple destinations such as email SMB FTP server document box and print Z Before you add module make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module e Fax See Preparing to fax on page 61 e Email Server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 56 Fax forwarding You can forward the received fax to another destinations To forward a fax your machine checks caller s ID that the fax service provides When the caller is also Samsung s fax machine your machine checks the fax number that the user defined for the machine information 4 Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 92 When you need to forward different destination for each caller you can create several workforms for each caller s ID Auto redirection If the fax transmission failed the machine re sends the fax image to the user s email address Z Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 92 Delayed start feature You can schedule the job s execution time by setting Delay Start in Properties tab when you creating a workform Notification feature You can notify the job processing result to an email Z Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification
312. tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not invoke Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the printer is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains stopped string press the Start button After that normal operation of the printer should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print document when port is claimed by a scanning application e Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present owner is not functioning properly e Check if your application h
313. ted after completing a job On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Scan to Server Confirmation The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed Off No report is printed after completing a job On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Z You can also print machine s status information and browse status with SyncThru Web Service Open the web browser on your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print information maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge This chapter includes Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Finding the serial number Sending the toner reorder notification Sending the imaging unit reorder notification Checking Document Box PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT See Printing a report on page 93 MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE If you want to view the supply life indicators follow the next step 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status 3 Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage remaining FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER If you want to check your serial number from the screen follow the next steps
314. ter com SetIP program is provided in the software CD Printer Driver Help Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing To access a printer driver help screen click Help from the printer properties dialog box Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support printer drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsungprinter com satety information IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS What the icons and signs in this user manual mean Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death WARNING Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire explosion electric shock or personal injury when using your laser MFP follow these basic safety precautions CAUTION Do NOT attempt Do NOT disassemble YTU Do NOT touch Follow directions explicitly Unplug the power plug from the wall socket Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock Call the service center for help Napaaga These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others Please follow them explicitly After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference Read and understand all instructions Use common sense whenever operat
315. ter networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media It consists of a hot roller and a back up roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to anot
316. tering a new name in the Printet 3 Name Field lf pou want other users on the network to access this printer click the check box in Share Name field and enter a share name that users will easily identity If you want this printer to be the default printer click the button in Default field Setting up this printer on a server To install this software on a server select the Setting up this printer on a server checkbox 8 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Nescccsenccocnsececseenscccesscnccssanscertanesceasenes I dlike to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Installing Printer Software in Windows Reinstalling Printer Software You can reinstall the software if installation fails 1 2 Start Windows From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your
317. ters and Faxes For Windows Vista 2008 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers Select the Samsung SCX 6545 Series PS printer Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties Select Device Settings Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the Installable Options section Click OK REPLACING THE STAPLER When the stapler is completely empty the message for installing the staple cartridge appears on the display screen 1 Open the finisher cover 3 Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit 4 Unpack the new staple cartridge 5 Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit 6 Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place Installing accessories_ 124 7 Close the finisher cover ENABLING FAX FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING THE FAX OPTION KIT After installing the Fax kit you have to set up the machine in order to use this function 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the General tab Press Country Change the country then some the values for fax a
318. the LDAP server has a referral server 14 Select Search Name Order 15 Check the box next to From Field Security Options 4 This option is only provided if you have selected the Network authentication option in the user authentication setting You may check this option if you want to search for information in a default email address group 16 Click on Apply User Accounting Method Enabling Acccounting Method 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 3 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Accounting gt Accounting Method 4 Select Standard Accounting l4 If you want to allow users to login only with ID then check Authenticate with Login ID only 5 Click on the Apply button Standard acccounting List 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 2 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 3 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Accounting gt Standard Accounting List 4 Select Standard Accounting You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add button Enter a user s ID password and assign job limitation to t
319. tion confirm message appears Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer Then you can fax or e mail the files display them on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver This chapter includes e Scanning Using SmarThru Office e Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software e Scanning Using the WIA Driver NOTES e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced qpi Scanning 28 Scanning Using SmarThru Office Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your machine You can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents from local or network scanners Starting SmarThru Office Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Once you have installed SmarThru Office you will
320. tion on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute See page 1 for more Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information See page1 for more information information FINDING MORE INFORMATION You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or onscreen Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Online User s Guide Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and installing accessories This user s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems and how to use the included software utilities Network Website You can set the network environment from your computer using network managing programs such as SetIP SyncThru Web Admin Service AnyWeb Print etc SyncThru Web Admin Service will be convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily You can download the SyncThru Web Admin Service or AnyWeb Print on http solution samsungprin
321. tion service and accounting service can be enabled independently The services refer to the user information differently case by case e Using Local Authentication only Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting Refers to User Profile from Security gt User Access Control menu e Using Network Authentication only Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting Refers to the user information in the network authentication server Disable the user in User Profile to access the device e Standard Accounting only Refers to the Standard Account List from SyncThru Web Service gt Security gt User Access Control gt Accounting See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 e Network Accounting only Refers to the user information in network authentication server Registering local authorized users 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service for your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 3 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Authentication gt Authentication Method 4 Select Local Authentication Click on the Apply button Click on Authority and check a Role Name according to the current user s role You can create a new role gro
322. tomatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Dupl
323. tronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To a
324. trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a las
325. ture is supported only when the original is on the DADF Z If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of originals the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Press more to see the values e Collated Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals e Staple Portrait Adds a single staple to all of your portrait oriented output e Staple Landscape Adds a single staple to all of your landscape oriented output Z The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker amp stapler See Stacker amp Stapler Finisher on page 121 Selecting the type of originals Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type Original Type Text Text Photo Photo e Text Use for originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs e Photo Use when originals are photographs Changing the darkness This defines the degree of darkness Use left right arrows to change the level of light dark in the printouts Light Dark co OD USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen you can select specific copy features Merging multiple jobs as a single copy This feature allows you to merge multipl
326. u to print PDF files directly Samsung Network PC Fax This program allows you to send a fax from you computer SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP Linux Postscript Printer Description PPD file Use this file to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents SANE Use this driver to scan documents Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Printer driver Macintosh Postscript Printer Description PPD file Use this file to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents Scanner driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses You can only use IPv
327. up by clicking on the Add button Click on User Profile and check the users You can add users by clicking the Add button If you want add information to the Address Book check the Automatically add your information to Address Book oa e e J e e Select the user s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated e Select the user s role from Role item 8 Click on Apply Register authorized network users 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click on Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 3 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Authentication gt Authentication Method 4 Select Kerberos SMB or LDAP Z Before configuring network authentication you need to configure External Authentication Server from Security gt Network Security 5 Click on the Apply button 6 Click on Authority and check the Role Name according to the current user s role e Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button 7 Click on User Profile and check the users e You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button e f you want add the information to Address Book check the Automatically add your information to Address Book option e Select the user s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated e Select the user s role from R
328. ure is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass oe y ala Gah NG 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Poster Copy Z This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are selected as below Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying 4 Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order Clone copying The machine prints multiple original images on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass lt mk a 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 33 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Copying_ 46 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy Z This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are selected as below Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this f
329. ustomer care center COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE ION CENTER Seer ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com at 0 07 min BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be fr French BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br 4004 0000 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com ca 726 7864 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com cn 010 6475 1880 COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com latin CZECH 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com cz REPUBLIC 800 726786 Samsung Zrt esk organiza n slo ka Oasis Florenc Sokolovsk 394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 8 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com dk ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com latin EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com latin ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 FINLAND 30 6227 515 www samsung com fi FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www samsung com fr GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG www samsung de 726 7864 0 14 min GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com latin HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung
330. ustomize the printer settings for your needs See the below part 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Sharing the Printer Locally You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer which is called host computer on the network The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help NOTES e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM 27 Sharing the Printer Locally Setting Up a Host Computer oor O N a Start Windows From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes Double click your printer driver icon From the Printer menu select Sharing Check the Share this printer box Fill in the Shared Name field and then click OK Setting Up a Client Computer Gi Right click the Windows Start button and select Explore Select My Network Places and then right click Search for Computers Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name field and click Search In case host computer requires User name and Password fill in User ID and password of host computer account Double click Printers and Faxes Right click printer driver icon select Connect Click Yes if the installa
331. ver via the SMB or FTP Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file g The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web Service and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service Click Address Book Click Add Enter a name and speed number Check Add SMB Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 10 If you want to allow the unauthorized person s access to SMB server check Anonymous By default this is unchecked 11 Enter the login name and password 12 Enter the domain name of the SMB server 13 Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the scanned images m O A LAO NG 14 Configure Scan folder creating policy Filing Policy and File Name 15 Click Apply Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server 1 Press Scan from the Main screen If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service See Managing your machine from the website on page 99 2 Press Scan t
332. verlay Deleting a Page Overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use In the printer properties window click the Advanced tab Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box Click Delete When a confirming message window appears click Yes ow Ff GW MY Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 4 Using Windows PostScript Driver If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD ROM to print a document PPDs in combination with the PostScript driver access printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the Windows PostScript drivers is provided on the supplied software CD ROM Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use NOTES Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first
333. vice 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Your machine s embedded website opens SyncThru Web Service allows administrator to set up the machine If you want to access Settings or Security menu login first Press Login button and enter user ID and password from the pop up window Then press LOGIN button The initial administrator s setting is as follows e The default ID admin e The default password sec00000 99 Maintenance troubleshootind This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Clearing document jams e Clearing paper jams TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs follow the steps outlined on page 100 e Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Loading paper on page 38 e Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media See Setting the paper size and type on page 40
334. watermark Advanced Printing 23 Using a Page Overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document 1 Create or open the document you want to print 2 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 3 Click the Advanced tab 4 Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list 5 Ifthe overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints on your document NOTE The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the o
335. without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951 A8 Z MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine s network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report See Printing out the machine s MAC address on page 31 IP Address Enter a new IP address for your machine e Subnet Mask Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine e Default Gateway Enter ta new Gateway for your machine 6 Select Apply then OK and OK again The printer will automatically print the configuration report Confirm that all the settings are correct Quit Safari You may close and eject the installation CD ROM If 31 Getting Started necessary restart the computer s firewall You have successfully changed the IP address subnet mask and gateway IP setting using SetIP Program Linux SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation Z You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP 1 Print the machine s network configuration report to find your machine s MAC address See Printing out the machine s MAC address on page 31 Open the opt Samsung mfp share utils Double click the SetIPApplet htmi file Click to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply When you enter the MAC address enter it without a colon CI ON 6 The machine prints the network in
336. work print server which allows you to Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments Customize machine settings Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning to email Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning to the FTP or SMB servers Customize printer copy and fax settings e SetIP Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See IP setting using SetIP Program Windows on page 30 IP setting using SetIP Program Macintosh on page 31 or IP setting using SetIP Program Linux on page 31 e AnyWeb Print This tool helps you to screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program Click Start gt All Programs gt you machine name gt AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is available for the download This tool is available only for Windows operating systems SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Windows REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED Os FREE HDD CPU RAM SPACE Windows 2000 Pentium II 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5 GB Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB
337. y an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel Using USB memory device 74 e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your Original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appropriate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Im
338. y when originals are Legal Letter or A5 sized If the originals is mixed sized then the machine detects the largest original size and select the largest sized paper in the tray e Mixed Size Letter 4 Legal Allows for the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together and the machine uses the proper sized paper from several trays For example if the originals are total 3 Copying 42 pages 1st page is the letter sized paper 2nd page is the legal sized paper and 3rd page is the letter sized paper then the machine prints the output first letter legal and letter in order from several trays e Other preset values Allows user to easily select commonly used values Reducing or enlarging copies Press the Basic tab gt Reduce Enlarge then use left right arrows to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper Press more to see the values F gt i Heady To Copy Copiii due Enlange fam Original 10076 LGL Mias Custom EY PASABI 275 400 Sol 100 feb LL TRTE A A TRA R b Jj ng Co ana e Original 10096 Prints texts or images the same size as originals e Auto Fit Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the Output paper e Other preset values Allows you to easily select commonly used values Z The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is placed In the DADF 25 200 adjustment is possible And in the scanner glass 25 400 adjustment is possi
339. your computer user s guide The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Print a Fax Phone Book list See Setting up a fax phonebook on page 66 The original does not feed into the machine e Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed e The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Port is Disabled e Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle Scanning has failed e There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished try your job again e The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again e The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off e The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly e Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer e The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Faxes ar
340. yout Paper Quality Tray Selection Paper Source r3 Automatically Select iw Media Printer Default v e Paper Source This option allows you to choose which tray to use e Media This option allows you to choose which media to use 25 Using Windows PostScript Driver 5 Using Direct Printing Utility This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without having to open the files CAUTION e HDD should be installed on your machine to print PDF files using this program You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing e Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version 1 4 and below For a higher version you must open the file to print it Overview Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your printer without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format To installing this program you should select Custom installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver Using Direct Printing Util
341. zz Please turn off then on Fuser unit is not installed correctly Install it Imaging unit is empty Replace it Imaging unit is not compatible Check user s guide Imaging unit is not installed Install it Imaging unit is worn Replace with new one LSU error zzz Please turn off then on Motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then on Original paper does not feed in scanner 109 Troubleshooting MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS There is a problem in the finisher unit There is a problem in the fuser unit working The fuser unit is not installed or correctly The toner in the imaging unit has run out The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine The imaging unit is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not connected The imaging unit is at the end of its life When the imaging unit replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue this message displays Turn the machine off and reinstall the finisher again Check that the finisher cable is connected properly If the problem persists please call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Install the fuser unit Call for service Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the imaging unit on page 97 Inst

Samsung SCX-6545N User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents